Volvo Automobile 2007 S80 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEAR VOLVO OWNER  
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO  
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your  
Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort  
of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in  
the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all cur-  
rent safety and environmental requirements.  
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend  
that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions  
and maintenance information contained in this owner’s  
manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
00 Introduction  
01 Safety  
02 Locks and alarm  
Important information .................................. 6  
Environment ................................................. 8  
Safety in the passenger compartment....... 12  
Safety mode............................................... 25  
Child safety ................................................ 26  
Remote control key/key............................. 34  
Keyless drive.............................................. 40  
Locks ......................................................... 42  
Alarm* ........................................................ 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Contents  
03 Your driving environment  
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
05 During your journey  
Instruments and controls............................ 50  
Ignition positions ........................................ 59  
Seats .......................................................... 60  
Steering wheel............................................ 63  
Lighting....................................................... 64  
Wipers and washing................................... 73  
Windows, rearview and door mirrors.......... 75  
Power sunroof* ........................................... 79  
Starting the engine..................................... 81  
Gearboxes .................................................. 84  
Foot brake .................................................. 87  
Parking brake.............................................. 89  
Menus and messages ................................ 94  
Climate control ........................................... 99  
Audio system............................................ 109  
Trip computer ........................................... 118  
Compass*................................................. 119  
Stability and traction control system........ 120  
Adapting driving characteristics............... 121  
Cruise control* ..........................................122  
Adaptive cruise control* ........................... 123  
Collision warning system with  
brake support*.......................................... 127  
Parking assistance* .................................. 130  
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS* ..... 132  
Recommendations during driving............ 152  
Refuelling.................................................. 155  
Fuel........................................................... 156  
Loading .................................................... 158  
Driving with a trailer.................................. 162  
Towing ...................................................... 168  
Comfort inside the  
passenger compartment.......................... 135  
Bluetooth handsfree*................................ 140  
Built-in phone*.......................................... 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Contents  
06 Maintenance and  
specifications  
07 Alphabetical index  
Engine compartment ............................... 172  
Lamps ...................................................... 177  
Wiper blades and washer fluid................. 184  
Battery...................................................... 186  
Fuses........................................................ 189  
Wheels and tyres...................................... 194  
Car care.................................................... 210  
Type designations .................................... 214  
Specifications .......................................... 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Introduction  
Important information  
page or directly adjacent to a table. This in-  
formation is an addition to the text that it re-  
fers to via a number.  
Option  
Reading the Owner’s Manual  
Certain functionality and equipment can be  
purchased as options when a new car is or-  
dered. The range of options may apply to all  
cars or sometimes only to certain variants  
and/or certain markets. All types of options  
are marked with an asterisk * in the Owner’s  
Manual.  
Introduction  
A good way of getting to know your new car  
is to read the owner’s manual, ideally before  
your first journey. This will give you the op-  
portunity to familiarise yourself with new  
functions, to see how best to handle the car  
in different situations, and to make the best  
use of all the car’s features. Please pay at-  
tention to the safety instructions contained in  
the manual.  
Message texts  
There are displays in the car that show text  
messages. These text messages are high-  
lighted in the Owner’s Manual by means of  
the text being slightly larger and printed in  
grey. Example DIM text.  
Contact your Volvo dealer for more informa-  
tion.  
Procedure lists  
Special texts  
Procedures where action must be taken in a  
certain sequence are numbered in the Own-  
er’s Manual.  
The equipment described in the owner’s  
manual is not present in all models. In addi-  
tion to standard equipment, this manual also  
describes options (factory fitted equipment)  
and certain accessories (extra equipment).  
WARNING  
Texts marked with WARNING advise of risk  
of personal injury.  
When there is a series of illustrations for  
step-by-step instructions each step is  
numbered in the same way as the corre-  
sponding illustration.  
IMPORTANT  
Volvo cars are adapted for the varying re-  
quirements of different markets, as well as  
for national or local legal requirements and  
regulations.  
There are numbered and unnumbered  
arrows which are used to illustrate a  
movement or to point out a component.  
Texts marked with IMPORTANT advise of  
risk of material damage.  
If there is no series of illustrations for step-  
by-step instructions then the different steps  
are numbered with normal numbers.  
The specifications, design features and illus-  
trations in this owner’s manual are not bind-  
ing. We reserve the right to make modifica-  
tions without prior notice.  
NOTE  
Texts marked with NOTE give advice or tips  
that facilitate use of features and functions  
for example.  
Position lists  
Red circles containing a number are used  
in overview images where different com-  
ponents are pointed out. The number  
recurs in the position list featured in  
connection with the illustration that de-  
scribes the item.  
© Volvo Car Corporation  
Footnote  
There is footnote information in the Owner’s  
Manual that is located at the bottom of the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
     
Introduction  
Important information  
Step lists  
Recording data  
Accessories and extra equipment  
A list of steps is used when there is a num-  
bered sequence in the Owner’s Manual.  
Example:  
One or more of the computers in your Volvo  
are capable of recording detailed informa-  
tion. This information is intended for use in  
research to enhance safety and for diagnos-  
ing faults in some of the in-car systems. The  
data may include details regarding seatbelt  
use by the driver and passengers, the func-  
tions of various vehicle systems and mod-  
ules, and status information about the en-  
gine, throttle, steering, brakes and other sys-  
tems. This data can also include details of  
the way the car is driven. This type of infor-  
mation can include, without being limited to,  
specific details such as vehicle speed, the  
use of the brake and accelerator pedals and  
steering wheel position. This latter type of  
data can be stored for a limited period while  
the car is being driven and subsequently dur-  
ing a collision or a near-collision. Volvo Car  
Corporation will not disclose the stored infor-  
mation without consent. However, Volvo Car  
Corporation may be forced to disclose the in-  
formation due to national legislation. Volvo  
Car Corporation and its authorised work-  
shops may also read and use the informa-  
tion.  
The incorrect connection and installation of  
accessories can negatively affect the car’s  
electrical system. Certain accessories only  
function when their associated software is in-  
stalled in the car’s computer system. Always  
contact an authorised Volvo workshop be-  
fore installing accessories which are con-  
nected to or affect the electrical system.  
• Coolant  
• Engine oil  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Introduction  
Environment  
der the heading, Reducing environmental  
impact below.  
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level  
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the  
carbon filter.  
Volvo Cars’ environmental philosophy  
Environmental care, safety and quality are  
the three core values which influence all op-  
erations of the Volvo Car Corporation. We  
also believe that our customers share our  
consideration for the environment.  
Efficient emission control  
Textile standard  
Your Volvo is manufactured following the  
concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept  
that encompasses a clean interior environ-  
ment as well as highly efficient emission con-  
trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are  
well below the applicable standards.  
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be  
pleasant and comfortable, even for people  
with contact allergies and for asthma suffer-  
ers. Extreme attention has been given to  
choosing environmentally-compatible mate-  
rials. This means that they also fulfil the re-  
Your Volvo complies with strict international  
environmental standards and is also manu-  
factured in one of the cleanest and most re-  
source-efficient plants in the world. Volvo  
Car Corporation has global certification to  
the ISO 14001 environmental standard. This  
standard supports the work within the area of  
the environment.  
1
quirements in the Öko-Tex 100 standard , a  
Clean air in the passenger  
compartment  
A passenger compartment filter prevents  
dust and pollen from entering the passenger  
compartment via the air intake.  
major advance towards a healthier passen-  
ger compartment environment.  
Öko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-  
pets, thread and fabrics for example. The  
leather in the upholstery undergoes chromi-  
um-free tanning with natural plant substanc-  
es and fulfils the certification requirements.  
EPI (Environmental Product Information) is  
supplied for all Volvo models. There you can  
see how the car’s lifecycle affects the envi-  
ronment.  
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (In-  
terior Air Quality System) ensures that the in-  
coming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic  
outside.  
Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI  
Volvo workshops and the environment  
Regular maintenance creates the conditions  
for long service life for the car and low fuel  
consumption, and this way you contribute to  
a cleaner environment. When Volvo’s work-  
shops are entrusted with the repair and  
maintenance of the car, it becomes part of  
our system. We make clear demands regard-  
ing the way in which our workshops are de-  
The system consists of an electronic sensor  
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-  
tored continuously and if there is an increase  
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such  
as carbon monoxide then the air intake is  
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy  
traffic, queues and tunnels for example.  
Fuel consumption  
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump-  
tion in each of their respective classes. Low-  
er fuel consumption generally results in lower  
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon di-  
oxide.  
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel  
consumption. For more information read un-  
1
More information on www.oekotex.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
   
Introduction  
Environment  
signed in order to prevent spills and dis-  
charges into the environment. Our workshop  
staff have the knowledge and the tools re-  
quired to guarantee good environmental  
care.  
• Use engine braking to slow down.  
• Avoid idling. Take consideration of local  
regulations. Switch off the engine in longer  
stationary traffic.  
• Always dispose of environmentally haz-  
ardous waste, such as batteries and oils,  
in an environmentally safe manner. If un-  
certain about disposal, consult an author-  
ised Volvo workshop for advice.  
Reducing environmental impact  
You can help reduce environmental impact,  
for example, by driving economically, by pur-  
chasing eco-labelled car care products and  
by servicing and maintaining the car accord-  
ing to the instructions in the owner’s manual.  
• Service your car regularly.  
• High speed increases consumption con-  
siderably due to increased wind resist-  
ance. A doubling of speed increases wind  
resistance four times.  
The following hints will help you to care for  
the environment:  
These hints will help reduce fuel consump-  
tion without increasing travel time or lessen-  
ing the enjoyment of driving. Apart from be-  
ing kind to your car, you’ll be saving money -  
and the Earth’s resources.  
• Decrease fuel consumption by choosing  
ECO tyre pressure, see page 207.  
• A roof load and ski box increase air resist-  
ance, leading to higher fuel consumption.  
Remove them immediately after use.  
• Remove unnecessary items from the car.  
The greater the load the higher the fuel  
consumption.  
• If the car is equipped with an engine block  
heater use it for a few hours before start-  
ing from cold. This reduces fuel consump-  
tion and exhaust emissions.  
• Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.  
• Drive in the highest gear possible. Low  
engine speeds result in lower fuel con-  
sumption.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
 
Safety in the passenger compartment..................................................... 12  
Safety mode............................................................................................. 25  
Child safety .............................................................................................. 26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
SAFETY  
01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
Releasing the seatbelt  
Always use seatbelts  
WARNING  
Press the red lock button and then let the  
seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not re-  
tract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so  
that it does not hang loose.  
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-  
self. Contact an authorised Volvo work-  
shop.  
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major  
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,  
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some  
of the protective characteristics of the seat-  
belt may have been lost, even if it appears  
to be undamaged. In addition, replace the  
seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The  
new seatbelt must be type-approved and  
intended for installation in the same position  
as the replaced seatbelt.  
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:  
• if it is pulled out too quickly.  
• during braking and acceleration.  
• if the car leans heavily.  
Keep in mind the following:  
• do not use clips or anything else that can  
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.  
Heavy braking can have serious conse-  
quences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure  
that all passengers use their seatbelts.  
• ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or  
caught on anything.  
WARNING  
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-  
son.  
• the hip strap must be positioned low down  
(not over the abdomen).  
It is important that the seatbelt lies against  
the body so it can provide maximum protec-  
tion. Do not lean the backrest too far back.  
The seatbelt is designed to protect in a nor-  
mal seating position.  
• tension the hip strap over the lap by  
pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as  
illustrated.  
WARNING  
Putting on a seatbelt  
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-  
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this  
may diminish the protection provided by the  
airbag in the event of a collision.  
Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by  
pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud  
"click" indicates that the seatbelt has locked.  
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the  
1
rear seat .  
1
Certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
         
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
1
pedals and steering wheel). Within this con-  
text, they should strive to position the seat  
Seatbelts and pregnancy  
Seatbelt reminder  
with as large a distance as possible between  
the abdomen and the steering wheel.  
The seatbelt should always be worn during  
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in  
the correct way. The diagonal section should  
wrap over the shoulder then be routed be-  
tween the breasts and to the side of the ab-  
domen. The lap section should lay flat over  
the thighs and as low as possible under the  
abdomen. – It must never be allowed to ride  
upward. Remove all slack from the seatbelt  
and ensure that it fits close to the body. In  
addition, check that there are no twists in the  
seatbelt.  
An audio signal and indicator lamp remind  
anyone not wearing a seatbelt to use one.  
The audio reminder is speed-dependent. Re-  
minder indicator lamps are located in the roof  
console and combined instrument panel. At  
low speed, the audio reminder will sound for  
the first 6 seconds.  
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt  
reminder system.  
Rear seat  
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has  
two subfunctions:  
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant driv-  
ers should adjust their seats and steering  
wheel such that they can easily maintain con-  
trol of the vehicle as they drive (which means  
they must be able to easily operate the foot  
• Provides information on which seatbelts  
are being used in the rear seat. This is  
shown on the information display. The  
1
Certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
   
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
message is automatically cleared after ap-  
prox. 30 seconds or can be acknowl-  
edged manually by pressing the READ  
button.  
Seatbelt tensioner  
Warning symbol on the combined  
instrument panel  
All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten-  
sioners. A mechanism in the belt tensioner  
tightens the seatbelt around in the event of a  
sufficiently forceful collision. This provides  
more effective restraint by the seatbelt for  
passengers.  
• Provides a warning if one of the rear  
seatbelts is unfastened during travel. This  
warning takes the form of a message on  
the information display along with the  
audio/visual signal. The warning ceases  
when the seatbelt is re-fastened or can be  
acknowledged manually by pressing the  
READ button.  
0
1
o
The message on the information display  
showing which seatbelts are in use is always  
available. Press the READ button to see  
stored messages.  
The airbag system is continually monitored  
by the system control module. The warning  
symbol on the combined instrument panel il-  
luminates in ignition position II or III. The  
symbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds  
provided the airbag system is fault-free.  
Certain markets  
An audio signal and indicator lamp remind  
the driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one.  
At low speed, the audio reminder will sound  
for the first 6 seconds.  
WARNING  
If the warning symbol for the airbag system  
remains on or illuminates while driving, it  
means that the airbag system is not func-  
tioning fully. The symbol indicates a fault in  
the seatbelt buckle, SIPS, IC system or  
other fault in the SRS system. Contact an  
authorised Volvo workshop urgently.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
   
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
Front passenger airbag  
As well as the warning symbol, a message  
may appear on the information display in  
some cases. If the warning symbol malfunc-  
tions, the warning triangle illuminates and the  
message SRS Airbag Service required or  
SRS Airbag Service urgent appears in the  
information display. Contact an authorised  
Volvo workshop immediately.  
Driver airbag  
The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental  
Restraint System) in the steering wheel to  
supplement the protection afforded by the  
seatbelt. This airbag is fitted into the centre  
of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is  
marked SRS AIRBAG.  
The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental  
Restraint System) to supplement the protec-  
tion afforded by the seatbelt. The passenger  
airbag is fitted and stowed above the glove-  
box. This panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag  
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as  
possible with their feet on the floor and  
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must  
be secured.  
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-  
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this  
may diminish the protection provided by the  
airbag in the event of a collision.  
WARNING  
Do not put objects in front of or above the  
dashboard where the passenger airbag is  
located.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
   
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
SRS system  
WARNING  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-  
bag (SRS) is activated.  
Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of  
the front passenger seat. No one shorter  
than 140 cm should ever sit in the front pas-  
senger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.  
Failure to follow the advice given above can  
endanger the life of the child.  
Location, left-hand drive  
Left-hand drive  
Location, right-hand drive  
Right-hand drive  
The system consists of airbags and sensors.  
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sen-  
sors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
 
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag de-  
flates when compressed. When this occurs,  
smoke escapes into the car. This is com-  
pletely normal. The entire process, including  
inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs  
within tenths of a second.  
shape similar to a key can also be used.) Fail-  
ure to follow the advice given above can en-  
danger life.  
Activating/deactivating the airbag  
(SRS)*  
WARNING  
If the car is equipped with a front passenger  
airbag (SRS), but does not have PACOS  
(Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), the air-  
bag will always be activated.  
IMPORTANT  
Repairs must only be performed by an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop. Work on the SRS  
system can cause malfunction and result in  
serious personal injury.  
WARNING  
Activated airbag (passenger seat):  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion on the front passenger  
seat when the airbag is activated. This ap-  
Indication in roof console  
NOTE  
The sensors react differently depending on  
the course of the collision and whether or  
not the seatbelts on the driver and passen-  
ger side are used. It is therefore possible  
that only one (or none) of the airbags may  
inflate in a collision. The SRS system sens-  
es the force of the collision on the car and  
adapts accordingly so that one or more air-  
bags are deployed. The capacity of the air-  
bags is also adapted to the collision force to  
which the vehicle is subjected.  
plies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.  
The airbag (SRS) for the front passenger seat  
can be deactivated. This is necessary if a  
child seat is to be fitted there for example.  
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat): No  
one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the  
front passenger seat when the airbag is de-  
activated.  
A text message on the roof panel indicates  
that the passenger airbag (SRS) is deactivat-  
ed.  
Activating/deactivating  
The switch is located on the passenger end  
of the dashboard and is accessible when the  
passenger door is open. Check that the  
switch is in the required position. Volvo rec-  
ommends that the key blade be used to  
change position. For information on the key  
blade, see page 37. (Other items with a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
 
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
Switch position  
Side airbags SIPS bags  
A large proportion of the collision force is  
transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protec-  
tion System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the  
roof and other structural parts of the body.  
The side airbags at the driver’s and front pas-  
senger seats protect the chest area and the  
hip and are an important part of the SIPS.  
The SIPS bag system consists of two main  
components, side airbag and sensors. The  
side airbags are located in the front seat  
backrests.  
WARNING  
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-  
senger seat if the text message in the roof  
panel indicates that the airbag (SRS) is de-  
activated and if the warning symbol for the  
airbag system is also displayed on the com-  
bined instrument panel. This indicates that  
there has been a severe malfunction. Con-  
tact an authorised Volvo workshop immedi-  
ately.  
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch)  
WARNING  
The airbag (SRS) is activated. With the  
switch in this position, persons taller than  
140 cm can sit in the front passenger  
seat, but never children in a child seat or  
on a booster cushion.  
Side airbags are a supplement to the SIPS  
system. Always use a seatbelt.  
WARNING  
The airbag (SRS) is deactivated. With the  
switch in this position, children in a child  
seat or on a booster cushion can sit in  
the front passenger seat, but never per-  
sons taller than 140 cm.  
Repairs must only be performed by an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop.  
Work on the SIPS system can cause mal-  
function and result in serious personal inju-  
ry.  
WARNING  
Do not put objects in the area between the  
outside of the seat and the door panel,  
since this area is required by the side air-  
bag.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
   
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbag  
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision  
trips the sensors and the side airbags are in-  
flated. The airbag inflates between the occu-  
pant and the door panel and thereby cush-  
ions the initial impact while deflating. The  
side airbag is only normally deployed on the  
side of the collision.  
SIPS bag system  
WARNING  
Use only seat covers approved by Volvo.  
Other seat covers may impede the opera-  
tion of the side airbags.  
Child seats and side airbags  
The side airbag does not diminish the protec-  
tion provided by the car to children seated in  
a child seat or on a booster cushion.  
A child seat or booster cushion can be  
placed on the front passenger seat provided  
that the car does not have an activated pas-  
senger airbag.  
Driver’s seat, left-hand drive  
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
Inflatable Curtain (IC)  
WARNING  
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the  
handles in the roof. The hook is only de-  
signed for light clothing (not for solid ob-  
jects such as umbrellas for example).  
Do not screw or install anything onto the  
car’s headlining, door pillars or side panels.  
This could compromise the intended pro-  
tection. Only ever use Volvo genuine parts  
that are approved for placement in these ar-  
eas.  
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is  
a supplement to the SIPS and SRS airbags. It  
is fitted in the headlining along both sides of  
the roof and protects both front and rear seat  
passengers. A sufficiently violent collision  
trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is  
inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to pre-  
vent the driver and front seat passenger from  
striking their heads on the inside of the car  
during a collision.  
WARNING  
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the  
seatbelts.  
Always use a seatbelt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
 
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS)  
consists of energy absorbing backrests and  
specially designed head restraints for the  
Correct seating position  
For the best possible protection, the driver  
and front seat passenger should sit in the  
Protection against whiplash injury –  
WHIPS  
front seats. The system is actuated by a rear-  
end collision, where the angle and speed of  
the collision, and the nature of the colliding  
vehicle all have an influence.  
centre of the seat with as little space as pos-  
sible between the head and the head re-  
straint.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
If a seat has been subjected to extreme  
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,  
the WHIPS system must be checked by an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the  
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.  
Part of the WHIPS system’s protective ca-  
pacity may have been lost even if the seats  
appear to be undamaged. Contact an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-  
tem checked even after a minor rear-end  
collision.  
Properties of the seat  
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the  
front seat backrests are lowered backward to  
alter the seating position of the driver and  
front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of  
whiplash injury.  
WARNING  
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS  
system yourself. Contact an authorised  
Volvo workshop.  
WHIPS system and child seats/booster  
cushions  
The WHIPS system does not diminish the  
protection provided by the car to children  
seated in a child seat or on a booster cush-  
ion.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
 
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the  
rear seat cushion and the front seat back-  
rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the  
function of the WHIPS system.  
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the  
corresponding front seat must be moved  
forward so that it does not touch the folded  
backrest.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
When the systems deploy  
System  
Triggered  
Seatbelt tensioner  
Airbags (SRS)  
In a frontal collision, side-impact accident or a rear-end collision.  
1
In a frontal collision .  
1
Side airbags (SIPS)  
Inflatable Curtain IC  
Whiplash protection WHIPS  
1
In a side-impact accident .  
1
In a side-impact accident and in some cases in a frontal collision .  
In a rear-end collision.  
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision even without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object  
hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.  
If the airbags have been deployed, Volvo rec-  
ommends:  
WARNING  
Never drive with deployed airbags. They  
• Have the car transported to an authorised  
can make steering difficult. Other safety  
Volvo workshop.Do not drive with de-  
systems may also be damaged. The smoke  
ployed airbags.  
and dust created when the airbags are de-  
ployed can cause skin and eye irritation/in-  
jury after intensive exposure. In case of  
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid  
deployment sequence and airbag fabric  
may cause friction and skin burns.  
• Let an authorised Volvo workshop replace  
components in the car’s safety system.  
• Always contact a doctor.  
WARNING  
NOTE  
The airbag control module is located in the  
centre console. If the centre console is  
drenched with water or other liquid, discon-  
nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to  
start the car since the airbags may deploy.  
Have the car transported to an authorised  
Volvo workshop.  
The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys-  
tems are deployed only once during a colli-  
sion.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
 
01 Safety  
01  
Safety in the passenger compartment  
The SRS airbag warning decal is located on  
the end face of the dashboard on the pas-  
senger side.  
SRS airbag warning decal  
AIRBAG decals  
SIPS airbag decal  
SRS airbag warning decal (Australia)  
The SIPS airbag decal is located on the door  
pillar  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
01 Safety  
01  
Safety mode  
Firstly, remove the remote control key and  
then reinsert it. The car’s electronics will then  
try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then  
try to start the car. If Safety mode is still  
shown on the display then the car must not  
be driven or towed. Even if the car appears to  
be driveable, hidden damage may make the  
car impossible to control once moving.  
Safety mode  
WARNING  
If the car is in safety mode it must not be  
towed. It must be transported to an author-  
ised Volvo workshop.  
Moving the car  
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode  
has been reset, the car can be moved care-  
fully out of a dangerous position. Do not  
move the car further than necessary.  
If the car is involved in a collision, the text  
Safety mode - See manual may appear on  
the information display. This means that the  
car has reduced functionality. Safety mode is  
a protective state that is enforced when the  
collision may have damaged any of the car’s  
vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors  
for one of the safety systems, or the brake  
system.  
WARNING  
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the  
electronics yourself if the car has been in  
safety mode. This could result in personal  
injury or the car not functioning as normal.  
Always allow an authorised Volvo workshop  
to check and restore the car to normal sta-  
tus after Safety mode has been displayed.  
Attempting to start the car  
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the  
car. There must be no smell of fuel either.  
WARNING  
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to  
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the  
Safety mode message is displayed. Leave  
the car at once.  
If everything seems normal and you have  
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you  
may attempt to start the car.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
       
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
General  
Child seats  
Location of child seats  
Volvo has child safety products that are de-  
signed for and tested by Volvo.  
You may place:  
The position of a child in the car and the  
choice of equipment are dictated by the  
child’s weight and size, for more information  
see page 27.  
• a child seat or booster cushion on the  
front passenger seat, provided the pas-  
senger airbag is not activated.  
When using other child safety products it is  
important to read the installation instructions  
included with the product.  
• a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat that  
uses the back of the front seat as support.  
NOTE  
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to  
the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails  
or beams under the seat. Sharp edges can  
damage the straps.  
Child seats and activated airbags are not  
compatible.  
Regulations regarding the placement of  
children in cars vary from country to coun-  
try.  
Always place a child in the rear seat if the  
passenger airbag is activated. A child in the  
front passenger seat may suffer serious inju-  
ry if the airbag deploys.  
Allow the back of the child seat to rest  
against the dashboard. This applies to cars  
without a passenger airbag, or where the air-  
bag is deactivated.  
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit  
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a  
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.  
Volvo’s own child safety equipment is de-  
signed for your car. Use Volvo genuine  
equipment to best ensure that the mounting  
points and attachments are correctly posi-  
tioned and are sufficiently strong.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Persons shorter than 140 cm may only sit in  
the front passenger seat if the passenger  
airbag is deactivated.  
Never place the child seat in the front seat if  
the car is equipped with an activated front  
passenger airbag. If problems arise when  
fitting child safety products, contact the  
manufacturer for clearer instructions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
       
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Placement of children in the car  
Weight/  
Front seat  
Age  
Outer rear seat  
Centre rear seat  
<10 kg  
(0–9 months)  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt, support legs and straps.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt, support legs and straps.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
seatbelt and straps.  
1
1
1
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
9–18 kg  
(9–36  
months)  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt and straps.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt, support legs and straps.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt, support legs and straps.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
1
1
1
15–36 kg  
(3–12 yr)  
Booster cushion with or without backrest. Booster cushion with or without backrest.  
Options:  
1
1
• Booster cushion with or without  
backrest.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03139  
L : Type approval no. E5 03139  
1
L : Type approval no. E5 03139  
• Integrated booster cushion.  
2
B : Type approval no. E5 03140  
1
Suitable for certain child seats as listed in the specified type approval. Child seats can be vehicle-specific, limited, semi-universal or universal.  
Integrated and approved for this age group.  
2
WARNING  
Never place the child seat in the front seat if  
the car is equipped with an activated front  
passenger airbag. If problems arise when  
fitting child safety products, contact the  
manufacturer for clearer instructions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
   
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats*  
Upper mounting points for child seats  
Integrated booster cushion*  
The car is equipped with upper mounting  
points for child seats. These mounting points  
are located on the parcel shelf and are con-  
cealed by plastic covers. Bend aside the  
plastic covers to access each respective  
mounting point.  
For cars with folding head restraints on the  
outside seats the head restraints should be  
folded to facilitate installation.  
For detailed information on how the child  
seat should be tensioned in the upper  
mounting points, see the seat manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
Volvo’s integrated booster cushion for the  
centre rear seat is specially designed to pro-  
vide optimum safety for children. Combined  
with the regular seatbelt, the booster cushion  
is approved for children weighing between  
15 and 36 kg. Check before driving that:  
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture sys-  
tem are concealed behind the lower section  
of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.  
The location of the mounting points is indi-  
cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery  
(see illustration above).  
• the seatbelt is in contact with the child’s  
body and is not slack or twisted  
Press the seat cushion down to access the  
mounting points.  
• the seatbelt is positioned correctly across  
the shoulder  
Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-  
tions when connecting a child seat to ISOFIX  
mounting points.  
• the lap section of the seatbelt is posi-  
tioned low over the pelvis to provide opti-  
mal protection  
WARNING  
• the seatbelt does not lie across the child’s  
throat or below the shoulder  
The child seat’s belts must always be rout-  
ed under the rear head restraints before  
they are tensioned at the mounting point.  
• the head restraint is adjusted to suit the  
child’s head.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
     
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Lowering the booster cushion  
Fold down the booster cushion.  
Release the Velcro fastener.  
Lift back the upper section.  
1
WARNING  
Repair or replacement should only be per-  
formed by an authorised Volvo workshop.  
Do not make any modifications or additions  
to the booster cushion. If an integrated  
booster cushion has been subjected to a  
major load, such as in conjunction with a  
collision, the entire booster cushion must  
be replaced. Even if the booster cushion  
appears to be undamaged, it may not afford  
the same level of protection. The booster  
cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily  
worn.  
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Raising the booster cushion  
Child safety locks  
Fold down the upper section.  
Secure the Velcro fastener.  
1
Manual locking of the rear doors  
Fold the booster cushion into the seat  
backrest.  
NOTE  
Make sure that both sections of the booster  
cushion are secured with the Velcro strap  
before folding up. Otherwise the upper sec-  
tion can become trapped in the rear seat  
backrest when the booster cushion is fold-  
ed down again.  
2
The child safety locks are located on the trail-  
ing edge of the rear doors and are only ac-  
cessible when the doors are open. Use the  
key blade to turn the lock and thus activate  
or deactivate the child safety lock.  
The doors cannot be opened from inside.  
The doors can be opened from inside.  
3
NOTE  
Cars with electric child safety locks do not  
have manual child locks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
 
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Electrical locking of the rear doors* and  
power windows  
WARNING  
Always keep the lock buttons pulled up  
when driving. In the event of an accident,  
this allows the emergency services to get  
into the car quickly. Passengers in the rear  
seat cannot open the doors from inside if  
the child safety locks are activated.  
The child safety locks can be activated in ig-  
nition position I or II. When the electric child  
safety locks are activated, the rear windows  
can only be opened from the driver’s door.  
The rear doors cannot be opened from in-  
side.  
Press the switch on the driver’s door. A mes-  
sage appears on the information display. The  
lamp on the button illuminates when the  
locks are activated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
 
Remote control key/key ........................................................................... 34  
Keyless drive............................................................................................ 40  
Locks........................................................................................................ 42  
Alarm*....................................................................................................... 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
LOCKS AND ALARM  
02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
02 Locks and alarm  
Remote control key/key  
The key blades’ unique code is available at  
authorised Volvo workshops, which can pro-  
duce new key blades.  
Indicator for locking/unlocking  
When the car is locked or unlocked using the  
remote control key, the direction indicators  
confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly  
performed:  
General  
The car is supplied with two remote control  
keys or PCCs (Personal Car Communicator).  
Up to six keys can be ordered. They are used  
to start the car and for locking and unlocking.  
02  
Loss of a remote control key  
If you lose a remote control key, take the oth-  
er remote control keys to an authorised Volvo  
workshop. The code of the missing remote  
control key must be erased from the system  
as a theft prevention measure.  
• locking: one flash  
The PCC has increased functionality com-  
pared with the remote control key. Only the  
remote control key is referred to in the re-  
mainder of this chapter when describing  
functions available in both the PCC and re-  
mote control key.  
• unlocking: two flashes.  
After locking the indication is only given if all  
locks are activated once the doors have been  
closed.  
The current number of keys registered to the  
car can be checked under Car settings  
The function can be activated/deactivated  
under Car settings  
Lock feedback light or Car settings  
Light settings Unlock feedback light.  
Light settings  
A maximum of six remote control keys can  
be programmed and used for one single car.  
Car key memory  
Number of keys. For a  
description of the menu system, see  
page 94.  
For a description of the menu system, see  
page 94.  
WARNING  
Key memory – door mirrors and driver’s  
seat*  
The settings are automatically connected to  
each respective remote control key, see  
page 61 and 77.  
If there are children in the car:  
Always remember to switch off the power  
supply to locks, power windows and sun-  
roof by removing the remote control key if  
the driver leaves the car.  
Immobiliser  
Each remote control key has a unique code.  
The car can only be started with the correct  
remote control key with the correct code.  
The function can be activated/deactivated  
Detachable key blades  
The following error messages in the informa-  
tion display (on the combined instrument  
panel) are related to the electronic  
immobiliser:  
under Car settings  
Car key memory  
A remote control key contains a detachable  
metal key blade for mechanical locking/un-  
locking the driver’s door, boot lid and glove-  
box (service locking).  
Seat & mirror positions. For a description of  
the menu system, see page 94.  
For cars with Keyless drive function, see  
page 41.  
For key blade functions, see page 37. For  
service locking, see page 38.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
           
02 Locks and alarm  
Remote control key/key  
Locking  
Functions – remote control key/PCC  
Message  
Specification  
Unlocking  
02  
Key error  
Try again  
Error reading remote  
control key during start.  
Try to start the car  
again.  
Approach lighting  
Boot lid  
2
4
1
3
Panic function  
Car key  
Not found  
Applies only to the  
PCC’s Keyless drive  
function. Errors  
reading the PCC during  
starting. Try to start the  
car again.  
5
Total airing function (global opening)  
One long press (at least 4 seconds) on  
button  
or  
opens or closes all windows  
(also closes the sunroof).  
Immobiliser  
See manual  
Remote control key  
function error during  
start. Contact an  
authorised Volvo  
workshop.  
WARNING  
Remote control key  
If the sunroof and windows are closed using  
the remote control key, check that no one is  
in danger of getting hands caught.  
For starting the car, see page 81.  
2
The function can be used to quickly air the  
car in hot weather for example.  
1
3
4
5
Low battery in remote control key  
The batteries should be replaced if:  
Function buttons  
Locking – Locks the doors and boot lid and  
then activates the alarm.  
• the information symbol illuminates and  
Car key Battery low is shown in the  
display and/or  
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and boot lid  
and deactivates the alarm.  
• the locks repeatedly do not react to sig-  
nals from the remote control key within  
20 metres.  
The function can be changed from unlocking  
all doors simultaneously, to opening the driv-  
er’s door after one press of the button and  
opening the remaining doors after a further  
press of the button (within 10 seconds). The  
For changing the battery, see page 39.  
PCC (Personal Car Communicator)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
           
02 Locks and alarm  
Remote control key/key  
function is changed under Car settings  
Unique functions – PCC  
NOTE  
Lock settings  
Unlocking, doors. For a  
02  
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates  
with repeated use of the information button  
and in different locations (as well as after  
7 seconds and after the light has travelled  
around on the PCC), contact an authorised  
Volvo workshop.  
description of the menu system, see  
page 94.  
2
2
Approach lighting – Used to switch on the  
car’s lighting at a distance. For more infor-  
mation, see page 69.  
1
2
Boot lid – Unlocks the boot lid only (without  
opening it). For more information, see  
page 43.  
The indicator lamps  
provide the informa-  
tion shown in the following illustration.  
Panic function – Used to attract attention in  
an emergency. Press and hold the red button  
for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within  
3 seconds to activate the direction indicators  
and the horn. The function can be turned off  
with the same button once it has been active  
for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function  
switches off automatically after 2 minutes  
and 45 seconds.  
1
3
2
Information button  
Indicator lamps  
Using the information button  
cess to certain information from the car via  
the indicator lamps  
enables ac-  
4
.
Using the information button  
1. Press the information button  
.
Range  
2. All indicator lamps  
flash for approxi-  
The remote control has a range of up to 20 m  
from the car.  
Green continuous light: the car is locked.  
mately 7 seconds and the light travels  
around on the PCC. This indicates that  
the information from the car has been  
read. If any if the other buttons are  
pressed during this time then the read-  
ing is interrupted.  
Yellow continuous light: the car is un-  
locked.  
NOTE  
Red continuous light: the alarm has been  
triggered.  
The remote control key functions can be  
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,  
buildings, topographical conditions etc. The  
car can always be locked/unlocked using  
the key blade, see page 37.  
Red light flashing alternately in the two  
indicator lamps: indicates, using the HBS  
(Heart beat sensor), that someone may  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
     
02 Locks and alarm  
Remote control key/key  
be in the car. This indication is only  
displayed if the alarm was triggered.  
The PCC that was last used for locking/un-  
locking will show the correct status.  
Detachable key blade  
Use the remote control key’s detachable key  
blade to block access to the glovebox and  
02  
Range  
NOTE  
1
cargo area . This means that the remote con-  
The PCC lock functions have a range of up  
to 20 m from the car.  
trol key without key blade can only be used  
to open the doors and to drive the car.  
If no indicator lamps illuminate when the in-  
formation button is used then this can be  
because the last communication between  
the PCC and the car was disrupted by sur-  
rounding radio waves, buildings, topo-  
graphical conditions etc.  
The approach lighting, panic function and the  
functions controlled by the information but-  
ton have a range of up to a maximum of  
100 m from the car.  
This key blade is used for locking the glove-  
box before leaving the car, such as for serv-  
icing or valet parking at a hotel for example  
(so-called service locking, see page 38).  
Hand over the remote control key and keep  
the removable key blade.  
Heart Beat Sensor  
NOTE  
The function  
operates using an HBS  
The information button functions can be  
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,  
buildings, topographical conditions etc.  
(Heart beat sensor). HBS is a supplement to  
the car’s alarm system and can indicate at a  
distance whether anybody is in the car. This  
indication is only displayed if the alarm was  
triggered.  
Unlocking with the key blade  
The key blade can be used if the remote con-  
trol key functions are disrupted or if the re-  
mote control key’s batteries have been dis-  
charged.  
Out of PCC range  
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the  
information to be read then the status the car  
was last left in is shown, without the light  
travelling around on the PCC.  
The HBS detects an individual’s heartbeat  
that is transmitted to the car’s bodywork. For  
this reason the function of the HBS can be  
disturbed in an environment subject to noise  
and vibration.  
Unlocking the boot lid, see page 44.  
The driver’s door is unlocked (without acti-  
vating central locking) using the key blade in  
the door handle’s keyhole. However, this  
triggers the alarm. Deactivate the alarm by  
inserting the remote control key in the igni-  
tion switch.  
Keyless drive  
See page 40.  
1
Applies to certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
         
02 Locks and alarm  
Remote control key/key  
Service locking: turn the key blade in the  
glovebox clockwise 180 degrees. This also  
means that the boot lid is blocked against  
opening with the remote control key (a mes-  
sage is shown in the information display).  
Removing the key blade  
Service locking*  
02  
1
Locking the glovebox, see page 43.  
2
Active locks for remote control key when service  
locking is not activated.  
Slide the spring-loaded catch  
while pulling the key blade straight out  
to the side  
backwards  
.
Inserting the key blade  
Carefully refit the key blade in place in the re-  
mote control key to avoid damaging it.  
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot  
pointed up and lower the key blade into its  
slot.  
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should  
hear a "click" when the key blade is  
locked in.  
Active locks for remote control key when service  
locking is activated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
   
02 Locks and alarm  
Remote control key/key  
Insert a screwdriver in the hole behind  
the spring-loaded catch and gently prise  
Remote control key  
Replacing the remote control key  
battery  
Carefully prise out the battery. Install a  
new one with the (+) side down.  
02  
the  
remote control key up.  
PCC  
1
NOTE  
Carefully prise out the batteries. First  
install one new one with the (+ ) side up.  
Position the white plastic tab in between  
and finally install a second new battery  
with the (+) side down.  
Turn the remote control key over with the  
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batter-  
ies falling out when it is opened.  
1
2
IMPORTANT  
Assembly  
1. Press the remote control key together.  
Avoid touching the battery and its terminals  
with your fingers, as this could damage their  
functionality.  
2. Hold the remote control key with the  
slot pointed up and lower the key blade  
into its slot.  
2
Battery replacement  
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should  
hear a "click" when the key blade is  
locked in.  
3
IMPORTANT  
Dispose of old batteries in an environmen-  
tally responsible manner.  
Battery type: CR2430, 3 V (one in remote  
control key and two in the PCC).  
Opening  
Slide the spring-loaded catch  
to the  
side while pulling the key blade straight  
Closely study how the battery/batteries  
are secured on the inside of the cover,  
with regard to their (+) and () sides.  
out backwards  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
   
02 Locks and alarm  
Keyless drive  
if the PCC is on the other side of the car to  
the door.  
Keyless drive (PCC only)  
IMPORTANT  
02  
Never leave a PCC behind in the car.  
Keyless lock and ignition system  
The red circles in the illustration indicate the  
range covered by the system’s antennas.  
Interference to PCC function  
If all PCCs are removed from the car and if all  
doors are closed then a warning message is  
shown in the information display and an au-  
dio reminder signal sounds at the same time.  
The message disappears when a PCC is  
brought back to the car.  
Electromagnetic fields and screening can in-  
terfere with the keyless drive system. For this  
reason, do not place the PCC near mobile  
phones or metallic objects.  
If interference is experienced nonetheless,  
use the PCC and key blade in the normal  
way, see page 35.  
The warning message and audio reminder  
signal disappear when the PCC is brought  
back to the car after:  
Unlocking  
Open the doors with the door handles or  
open the boot lid with its handle.  
• a door has been opened and closed  
• the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch  
• the READ button has been pressed.  
The keyless drive function in the PCC allows  
the car to be unlocked, driven and locked  
without the need for a key. You simply have  
to have the PCC with you. The system makes  
it easier and more convenient to open the  
car, for example when your hands are full.  
Unlocking with the key blade  
If the keyless drive function in the PCC is not  
operating, then the driver’s door can be un-  
locked with the key blade. In this case central  
locking is not activated.  
Handling the PCC safely  
If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in  
the car, it is deactivated temporarily when the  
car is locked. This prevents unauthorised en-  
try.  
The car’s two PCCs incorporate the Keyless  
function. Additional PCCs can be ordered.  
NOTE  
However, if someone breaks into the car,  
opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be  
reactivated. It is therefore important to han-  
dle all PCCs with equal care.  
PCC range  
Unlocking with the key blade triggers the  
alarm. For deactivation, see page 46.  
In order to open a door or the boot lid, a PCC  
must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres  
from the car door handle or boot lid. This  
means that the person who wishes to lock or  
unlock a door must have the PCC with him or  
her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
     
02 Locks and alarm  
Keyless drive  
Key memory – driver’s seat and door  
mirrors*  
02  
PCC memory function  
If several people with PCCs approach the  
car, then the settings for the person who  
opens the driver’s door are implemented.  
The settings are changed in two ways after  
the driver’s door has been opened:  
• from the driver’s seat position: press the  
unlock button on the PCC, see page 35  
• press the button for seat settings, see  
page 61.  
Locking  
Lock the doors and boot lid by pushing in the  
lock button on one of the door handles on  
the outside.  
All doors and the boot lid must be closed be-  
fore the car can be locked. Otherwise the car  
will not be locked.  
Lock settings  
The keyless function can be adapted to  
specify which of the car doors are to be un-  
locked, under Car settings  
settings Keyless entry. For a description  
of the menu system, see page 94.  
Lock  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
 
02 Locks and alarm  
Locks  
Automatic relocking  
Locking and unlocking  
From the inside  
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened  
within two minutes of unlocking, all are  
locked again automatically. This function  
prevents the car from being left unlocked un-  
intentionally. For cars with alarms, see  
page 45.  
02  
From the outside  
The remote control key locks/unlocks all  
doors and the boot lid simultaneously. The  
lock buttons and inside handles of the doors  
1
are disengaged during locking .  
The fuel filler flap can be opened when the  
car is unlocked. It cannot be opened if the  
car is locked and the alarm is armed.  
Automatic locking  
The doors and boot lid can be locked auto-  
matically when the car starts to move.  
This function can be activated/deactivated  
NOTE  
under Car settings  
Lock settings  
Au-  
All of the doors and the boot lid can be  
locked or unlocked simultaneously using the  
door buttons on the door panel.  
The car can be locked even if a door is  
tolock, doors. For a description of the menu  
system, see page 94.  
1
open . It is also locked when the door is  
closed, and there is a risk that the remote  
control key will be locked in.  
Unlocking  
Press the door unlock button. Press and hold  
to also open all windows.  
1
Only applies to cars in certain markets, but not  
to cars with Keyless drive.  
Locking  
Press the door lock button after the front  
doors are closed. Press and hold to also  
close all of the windows and the sunroof if fit-  
ted.  
WARNING  
Be aware that there is a risk that you can be  
locked in the car if it is locked from the out-  
side.  
All the doors can be locked manually with  
their respective lock buttons after they have  
been closed. Pull the door handle once to  
unlock the door. Pull the door handle twice to  
open the door.  
1
Applies to certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
             
Locks  
The alarm indicator on the instrument panel  
starts to flash, which shows that the alarm is  
armed.  
Glovebox  
Unlocking/locking the boot lid  
A
B
02  
If the doors are locked when the boot lid is  
closed then it remains unlocked until the car  
is locked with the remote control.  
Unlocking the car from inside  
Unlock the glovebox by turning the key a  
quarter of a turn (90 degrees) anticlock-  
wise. The keyhole is vertical in the un-  
locked position.  
Unlocking with the remote control key  
Press the remote control key button to un-  
lock the boot lid.  
1
Lock the glovebox by turning the key a  
quarter of a turn (90 degrees) clockwise.  
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked  
position.  
NOTE  
The function does not open the boot lid.  
Press the headlamp control panel button  
to unlock the boot lid.  
The alarm indicator on the instrument panel  
goes out to show that the whole car is not  
armed. The alarm’s level and movement sen-  
sors and the sensors for opening the boot lid  
are automatically disconnected. The doors  
remain locked and armed.  
The glovebox can only be locked and un-  
locked with the removable key blade in the  
remote control key.  
Service locking, see page 38.  
Locking with the remote control key  
Press the remote control key button for lock-  
ing, see page 35.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
         
02 Locks and alarm  
Locks  
1
ble within one minute after the engine has  
stopped.  
Unlocking with the key blade  
Deadlocks  
1
02  
2. Press the button.  
If the car is equipped with an alarm, the  
movement and tilt detectors* are also deacti-  
vated at the same time, see page 47.  
The light in the button remains on until the  
car is locked with the remote control key. A  
message remains on the display for  
10 seconds or until the car is locked. The de-  
tectors and deadlocks are reactivated the  
next time the car is started.  
2
When deadlocked, the doors cannot be  
opened from the inside if they are locked.  
The deadlocks are activated with the remote  
control key and are set after a 10 second de-  
lay after the doors are locked.  
WARNING  
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car  
without first deactivating the deadlocks to  
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.  
The car can only be unlocked from a dead-  
lock state with the remote control key. The  
driver’s door can also be unlocked from the  
outside with the key.  
If the remote control key button for opening  
the boot lid is not working then the boot lid  
can be unlocked with the key blade.  
Temporary deactivation of deadlocks  
If someone wants to stay in the car and the  
doors still need to be locked from the out-  
side, then the deadlocks can be deactivated.  
Prise off the plug covering the keyhole.  
Unlock the boot lid by turning the key  
blade one half turn anticlockwise as  
illustrated.  
1. Remove the remote control key from the  
ignition switch. Deactivation is only possi-  
1
Applies to certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
       
02 Locks and alarm  
Alarm*  
General  
Arming the alarm  
NOTE  
Press the remote control key lock button. A  
long flash from the car’s direction indicators  
confirms that the alarm is armed and that the  
doors are locked.  
The alarm is triggered if:  
02  
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm  
system components. All such attempts  
could affect the terms of insurance.  
• a door, the bonnet or the boot lid is  
opened  
• a non-approved key is used in the keyhole  
or if force is exerted on the keyhole.  
The way in which the car confirms that the  
alarm is armed can be adapted to your re-  
Alarm indicator  
• a movement is detected in the passenger  
compartment (if fitted with a movement  
detector)  
quirements under Car settings  
settings Keyless entry. For a description  
of the menu system, see page 94.  
Lock  
• the car is raised or towed away (if fitted  
with a tilt detector*)  
• a battery cable is disconnected.  
• anyone tries to disconnect the siren.  
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a mes-  
sage appears on the information display.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.  
NOTE  
An alarm indicator on the dashboard indi-  
cates the alarm system’s status:  
The movement detectors trigger the alarm  
in the event of movements in the passenger  
compartment. For this reason the alarm  
could be triggered is the car is left with a  
window open or if an electric passenger  
compartment heater is used. To avoid this:  
close the windows when leaving the car and  
aim the air from the passenger compart-  
ment heater so that it is not directed up into  
the passenger compartment.  
• lamp off – the alarm is disarmed  
• the lamp flashes once a second – the  
alarm is armed  
• the lamp flashes rapidly after disarming  
the alarm (and until the remote control key  
is inserted in the ignition switch and igni-  
tion position I is reached) – the alarm has  
been triggered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
           
02 Locks and alarm  
Alarm*  
Disarming the alarm  
Deactivating a triggered alarm  
Other alarm functions  
Press the remote control key unlock button.  
Two short flashes from the car’s direction in-  
dicators confirm that the alarm is disarmed  
and that the doors are unlocked.  
Press the remote control key unlock button  
or insert the remote control key in the ignition  
switch. Confirmation is given by two short  
flashes from the direction indicators.  
02  
Automatic arming of the alarm  
This function prevents the car being left with  
alarm disarmed unintentionally.  
If the car is unlocked with the remote control  
key (and the alarm is disarmed) and none of  
the doors or the boot lid is opened within two  
minutes then the alarm is automatically  
armed. The car is locked at the same time.  
Alarm signals  
When the alarm is triggered, the following  
happens:  
• A siren sounds for less than 30 seconds.  
The siren has its own battery which is  
independent of the car battery.  
• The direction indicators flash for five min-  
utes or until the alarm has been deactivat-  
ed.  
Remote control key not working  
If the remote control key is not working, the  
alarm can still be switched off and the car  
started as follows:  
1. Open the driver’s door with the key blade.  
The alarm is triggered and the siren  
sounds.  
2. Insert the remote control key in the  
keyhole. The alarm is deactivated. The  
alarm indicator flashes quickly until the  
remote control key is inserted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
           
02 Locks and alarm  
Alarm*  
3. Wait 15 seconds.  
Temporary disarming of the alarm  
Deactivation of the detectors  
Testing the alarm system  
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under  
the dashboard. A siren sounds and all  
direction indicators flash.  
02  
Testing the movement detector in the  
passenger compartment  
1. Close all windows. Remain in the car.  
2. Arm the alarm, see page 45.  
3. Wait 15 seconds.  
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the  
car with the remote control key.  
4. Trigger the alarm by moving your arms  
forward and back at backrest height. A  
siren sounds and all direction indicators  
flash.  
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the  
car with the remote control key.  
Testing the alarm sensors in the doors  
1. Arm the alarm, see page 45.  
To prevent the alarm being triggered errone-  
ously, such as during a ferry journey, the  
movement and tilt detectors can be tempo-  
rarily disengaged.  
2. Wait 15 seconds.  
3. Unlock the driver’s door using the key  
blade.  
Press the button for disengagement. Disen-  
gagement is only possible within one minute  
after the engine has stopped. The light in the  
button remains on until the car is locked.  
4. Open the driver’s door. A siren sounds  
and all direction indicators flash.  
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the  
car with the remote control key.  
A message remains on the display for  
10 seconds or until the car is locked.  
Testing the alarm sensors in the bonnet  
1. Sit in the car and deactivate the alarm, see  
page 46.  
The detectors are reactivated the next time  
the car is started.  
If the car is equipped with deadlocks then  
this is engaged at the same time, see  
page 44.  
2. Arm the alarm, see page 45. Remain in  
the car and lock the doors with the  
button on the remote control key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
     
Instruments and controls ......................................................................... 50  
Ignition positions...................................................................................... 59  
Seats ........................................................................................................ 60  
Steering wheel ......................................................................................... 63  
Lighting .................................................................................................... 64  
Wipers and washing................................................................................. 73  
Windows, rearview and door mirrors ....................................................... 75  
Power sunroof*......................................................................................... 79  
Starting the engine................................................................................... 81  
Gearboxes................................................................................................ 84  
Foot brake................................................................................................ 87  
Parking brake ........................................................................................... 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT  
03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
03 Your driving environment  
Instruments and controls  
Instrument overview  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
03  
20  
9
9
11  
12  
13  
14  
10  
10  
18  
17  
16  
15  
19  
Left-hand drive  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
     
03 Your driving environment  
Instruments and controls  
Function Page  
Function  
Page  
Menus and messages, direction indicators, main/  
dipped beam, trip computer  
97, 67, 65,  
118  
Menu control, climate control and audio system  
94, 102,  
112  
Cruise control  
122, 58  
63, 15  
54, 58  
Climate control, ECC  
Gear selector  
102  
Horn, airbags  
84  
03  
Combined instrument panel  
Menu, audio and phone control  
Controls for active chassis (Four-C)  
Wipers and washing  
121  
73, 74  
94, 109,  
140  
Ignition switch  
81  
59  
67  
Steering wheel adjustment  
Parking brake  
63  
Start/stop button  
Hazard warning flashers  
Door handle  
89, 89  
172  
60  
Bonnet opener  
Seat adjustment  
Control panel  
75, 77, 31,  
42  
Headlamp control, opener for fuel filler flap and boot  
lid  
64, 155,  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
03 Your driving environment  
Instruments and controls  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
03  
9
10  
11  
10  
11  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
Right-hand drive  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
03 Your driving environment  
Instruments and controls  
Function Page  
Function  
Page  
Hazard warning flashers  
67  
Control panel  
75, 77, 31,  
42  
Ignition switch  
59  
Seat adjustment  
Bonnet opener  
60  
Start/stop button  
Cruise control  
81  
172  
89, 89  
63  
03  
122, 123  
54, 58  
63, 15  
Parking brake  
Combined instrument panel  
Horn, airbags  
Steering wheel adjustment  
Menus and messages, direction indicators, main/  
dipped beam, trip computer  
97, 67, 65,  
118  
Menu, audio and phone control  
94, 109,  
140  
Controls for active chassis (Four-C)  
121  
Wipers and washing  
73, 74  
Gear selector  
84  
Headlamp control, opener for fuel filler flap and boot  
lid  
64, 155,  
158  
Climate control, ECC  
102.  
Door handle  
Menu control, climate control and audio system  
94, 102,  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
03 Your driving environment  
Instruments and controls  
Information displays  
Meters  
Indicator, information and warning  
symbols  
1
2
3
3
03  
123456  
0
1
0
1
T2  
12.3  
12:34  
0
1
o
_3C  
P
1
1
1
2
2
Information displays  
The information displays  
Meters in the combined instrument panel  
Indicator and warning symbols  
show informa-  
Speedometer  
tion on some of the car’s functions, e.g.  
cruise control, trip computer and messages.  
The information is shown with text and sym-  
bols.  
Indicator and information symbols  
Fuel gauge, see also refuelling, page 155.  
1
Indicator and warning symbols  
Tachometer  
The meter indicates engine speed in  
thousands of revolutions per minute  
(rpm).  
Main beam and direction indicator sym-  
bol  
There are further descriptions under the  
functions that use the information displays.  
Functionality check  
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate  
in ignition position II or when the engine is  
started. When the engine has started, all the  
symbols should go out except the parking  
brake symbol, which only goes out when the  
brake is disengaged.  
1
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low  
oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given  
via display text, see page 173.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
           
03 Your driving environment  
Instruments and controls  
If the engine does not start or if the function-  
ality check is carried out in ignition position II  
then all symbols go out after 5 seconds ex-  
cept the symbol for a faults in the car’s emis-  
sions system and the symbol for low oil pres-  
sure.  
Indicator and information symbols  
Symbol Specification  
Fault in emissions system  
Drive to an authorised Volvo work-  
shop to have the system checked.  
Direction indicators on  
trailer  
ABS fault  
If this symbol illuminates then the sys-  
tem is not working. The car’s regular brake  
system continues to work, but without the  
ABS function.  
Fault in emissions system  
03  
ABS fault  
Rear fog lamp  
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off  
the engine.  
Stability system  
2. Restart the engine.  
Engine preheater (diesel)  
Low level in fuel tank  
3. Drive to an authorised Volvo workshop  
to have the ABS checked if the symbol  
remains lit.  
Rear fog lamp  
This symbol illuminates when the rear  
fog lamp is on.  
Information, read display  
text  
Main beam On  
Stability system  
Left-hand direction  
indicators  
A flashing symbol indicates that the  
stability system is operating. If the symbol il-  
luminates with constant glow then there is a  
fault in the system.  
Right-hand direction  
indicators  
Direction indicators on trailer  
Engine preheater (diesel)  
This symbol flashes when the direc-  
tion indicators are used and the trailer is con-  
nected. If the symbol flashes more quickly,  
then one of the lamps on the trailer or the car  
is faulty.  
This symbol illuminates during engine  
preheating. Preheating occurs when the tem-  
perature is below –2 C. The car can be start-  
ed once the symbol goes out.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
 
03 Your driving environment  
Instruments and controls  
Both direction indicator symbols flash when  
the hazard warning flashers are used.  
symbol lights up and the oil level is normal,  
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.  
Low level in fuel tank  
This symbol illuminates when there  
are approximately eight litres of fuel left in a  
petrol-engined car, or seven litres in a diesel-  
engined car.  
Parking brake applied  
Indicator and warning symbols  
Symbol Specification  
This symbol illuminates with a con-  
stant glow when the parking brake is applied.  
With the electric parking brake, this symbol  
flashes while it is being applied and then illu-  
minates with a constant glow.  
Information, read display text  
When one of the car’s systems does  
1
Low oil pressure  
03  
not behave as intended, this information  
symbol illuminates and a text appears on the  
information display. The message text is  
cleared using the READ button, see page 97  
or it disappears automatically after a time  
(time depending on which function is indicat-  
ed). The information symbol can also illumi-  
nate in conjunction with other symbols.  
Parking brake applied  
Airbags – SRS  
A flashing symbol means that a fault has aris-  
en. Read the message on the information  
display.  
Seatbelt reminder  
Alternator not charging  
Fault in brake system  
Warning  
NOTE  
This symbol also illuminates when the me-  
chanical parking brake is only lightly ap-  
plied.  
NOTE  
When a service message is shown, the  
symbol and message are cleared using the  
READ button, or disappear automatically  
after a time.  
Airbags – SRS  
If this symbol remains on or illumi-  
nates while driving, it means a fault has been  
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS,  
or IC systems. Drive immediately to an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop to have the system  
checked.  
1
For certain engine variants, the symbol  
for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings  
are given via display text, see page 173  
and 174.  
Main beam On  
The symbol illuminates when main  
beam is on and with main beam flash  
Low oil pressure  
Seatbelt reminder  
This symbol illuminates if someone in  
a front or rear seat has not put on his or her  
seatbelt.  
If this symbol illuminates during driv-  
ing then the engine’s oil pressure is too low.  
Stop the engine immediately and check the  
engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the  
Left-hand direction indicators  
Right-hand direction indicators  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
 
03 Your driving environment  
Instruments and controls  
Alternator not charging  
Reminder – doors not closed  
If one of the doors, the bonnet or boot lid is  
WARNING  
1
This symbol illuminates during driving  
if a fault has occurred in the electrical sys-  
tem. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.  
If the level in the reservoir is below MIN,  
the car should be transported to an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop to have the  
brake system checked.  
not closed properly then the information or  
warning symbol illuminates together with an  
explanatory text message in the combined  
instrument panel. Stop the car in a safe place  
as soon as possible and close the door, bon-  
net or boot lid, whichever is open.  
Fault in brake system  
If this symbol lights, the brake fluid  
level may be too low. Stop the car in a safe  
place and check the level in the brake fluid  
reservoir, see page 176.  
03  
WARNING  
If the brake and ABS symbols are on at the  
same time, there is a risk that the rear end  
will skid during heavy braking.  
If the car is driven at a speed lower  
than 7 km/h then the information sym-  
bol illuminates.  
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at  
the same time, there may be a fault in the  
brake force distribution system.  
Warning  
If the car is driven at a speed higher  
The red warning symbol illuminates  
when a fault has been indicated which could  
affect the safety and/or driveability of the car.  
An explanatory text is shown on the informa-  
tion display at the same time. The symbol re-  
mains visible until the fault has been rectified  
but the text message can be cleared with the  
READ button, see page 97. The warning  
symbol can also illuminate in conjunction  
with other symbols.  
than 7 km/h then the warning symbol il-  
luminates.  
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off  
the engine.  
2. Restart the engine.  
• If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-  
ing.  
• If the symbols remain on, check the level  
in the brake fluid reservoir. See page 176.  
If the brake fluid level is normal but the  
symbols are still illuminated, the car can  
be driven, with great care, to an author-  
ised Volvo workshop to have the brake  
system checked.  
Action:  
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car  
further.  
2. Read the information on the information  
display. Implement the action in accord-  
ance with the message in the display.  
Clear the message using READ.  
1
Only cars with alarm  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
03 Your driving environment  
Instruments and controls  
Controls for trip meter and clock  
Trip meter  
Clock  
1
123456  
12.3  
03  
T2  
12.3  
T2  
12:34  
12:34  
0
1
0
1
oo  
o
_3C  
_3C  
P
2
1
2
Location of controls  
Trip meter and button  
The meters are used to measure short dis-  
Clock and setting knob  
Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to  
tances. A short press on switches be-  
set the time. The set time is shown in the in-  
tween the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long  
press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active  
trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in  
formation display  
.
The clock can be temporarily replaced by a  
symbol in conjunction with a message, see  
page 97.  
the display  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
     
03 Your driving environment  
Ignition positions  
Return to ignition position 0  
Press START/ STOP to return from I, II, or III  
to ignition position 0.  
Functions  
NOTE  
The brake/clutch must not be depressed if  
ignition positions I or II are required.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
During towing, ignition position II should be  
used so that the lighting can be switched  
on.  
03  
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can  
impair the function or destroy the lock.  
Position Function  
Ignition position 0  
Insert the remote control key in the ignition  
switch.  
Odometer, clock and temper-  
ature gauge are illuminated. The  
steering lock is deactivated. The  
audio system can be used.  
0
Ignition switch with remote control key, start/  
stop button  
Ignition position I  
Press the remote control key into the ignition  
switch and press START/ STOP.  
Sunroof, power windows,  
phone, ventilation fan, ECC,  
windscreen wipers can be used.  
I
Insert and remove the remote control  
key  
The remote control key is inserted into the ig-  
nition switch. With one gentle push the re-  
mote control key is captured into the correct  
position.  
The headlamps come on.  
Warning/indicator lamps  
illuminate for 5 seconds. All  
equipment operates apart from  
heated seats and rear window  
defroster which only work when  
the engine is running.  
II  
Ignition position II  
Press the remote control key into the ignition  
switch and press START/ STOP for approx.  
2 seconds.  
The remote control key is withdrawn from the  
ignition switch by means of one touch. The  
key is then ejected and can be removed.  
Automatic transmission* must be in  
position P.  
Starting the engine III  
Start the engine, see page 81.  
Stopping the engine  
Press START/ STOP. (If the engine is running  
and the car is moving, keep the button de-  
pressed until the engine stops).  
For information on the audio system’s func-  
tions with remote control key removed, see  
page 109.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
       
03 Your driving environment  
Seats  
Lowering the front seat backrest  
Power seat*  
Front seats  
03  
2
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
3
1
1
2
3
Front edge of seat cushion up/down  
Seat forward/backward and up/down  
Backrest rake  
1
The passenger seat backrest can be folded  
forward to make room for long loads.  
Lumbar support, turn the wheel .  
Forward/backward: lift the handle to ad-  
just the distance to the steering wheel  
and pedals. Check that the seat is locked  
after changing position.  
Move the seat as far back/down as pos-  
sible.  
The power front seats have overload protec-  
tion which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an  
object. If this happens, turn off the ignition  
and wait a short time before adjusting the  
seat again.  
Adjust the backrest to an upright position  
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,  
pump up/down.  
Lift the catches on the rear of the back-  
rest and fold it forward.  
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.  
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.  
Control panel for power seat*.  
Push the seat forward so that the head re-  
straint "locks" in under the glovebox.  
Only one of the electric motors can be used  
at a time.  
WARNING  
Adjust the position of the driver’s seat be-  
fore setting off, never while driving. Check  
that the seat is locked in position.  
1
Also applies to power seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
             
03 Your driving environment  
Seats  
release the button then the movement of the  
seat will stop.  
It is also possible to use the key memory by  
pressing the unlock button on the remote  
control key when the driver’s door is open.  
Preparations  
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time  
after unlocking the door with the remote con-  
trol key without the key in the ignition switch.  
Seat adjustment is normally made when the  
ignition is on and can always be made when  
the engine is running.  
Key memory* in remote control key  
The positions of the driver’s seat and the  
door mirrors are stored in the key memory  
when the car is locked with the remote con-  
trol key.  
The key memory can be activated/deactivat-  
ed under Car key memory  
Seat & mirror  
positions. For a description of the menu sys-  
tem, see page 94.  
03  
Seat with memory function*  
NOTE  
1
2
3
4
The key memory in the two remote controls  
and the seat memory are completely inde-  
pendent of each other.  
When the car is unlocked with the same re-  
mote control and the driver’s door is opened  
the driver’s seat and also the door mirrors  
automatically adopt the positions stored in  
the key memory.  
Store setting  
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.  
2. Press and hold the button, while  
depressing the  
,
or  
button.  
NOTE  
Using a stored setting  
Press one of the memory buttons  
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you  
The seat and the door mirrors do not move  
if they are already in the relevant position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
   
03 Your driving environment  
Seats  
Emergency stop  
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press  
one of the buttons to stop the seat.  
Lowering the outer head restraints, rear  
seat*  
Rear seats  
Lowering the rear seat backrest  
See information, page 159.  
Restarting to reach the seat position stored  
in the key memory is performed by pressing  
the unlock button on the remote control key.  
In this situation the driver’s door must be  
open.  
Head restraint, centre seat, rear  
03  
WARNING  
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do  
not play with the controls. Check that there  
are no objects in front of, behind or under  
the seat during adjustment. Ensure that  
none of the backseat passengers will be  
trapped.  
1. The ignition must be in position I or II.  
2. Press the button to lower the rear head  
restraints to improve visibility.  
Do not lower the head restraints if there are  
passengers using the outer seats. The head  
restraint is moved back manually.  
Heated/ventilated seats*  
See page 102.  
The head restraint is adjusted vertically ac-  
cording to the height of the passenger. The  
top of the head restraint is adjusted to the  
rear centre of the head. Slide it up as re-  
quired. To lower the head restraint again the  
button by the left-hand shaft must be  
pressed in while the head restraint is pressed  
down.  
NOTE  
The head restraints must be in locked posi-  
tion after being raised.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
   
03 Your driving environment  
Steering wheel  
Adjusting  
Keypads  
Horn  
1
2
03  
1
2
Adjusting the steering wheel  
Keypads in the steering wheel  
Horn  
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both  
height and depth:  
Cruise control, see page 122  
Press the centre of the steering wheel to sig-  
nal.  
Adaptive cruise control, see page 125  
1. Pull the lever  
towards you to release  
Audio and phone control, see page 109  
the steering wheel.  
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the  
position  
that suits you.  
3. Push back the lever  
to fix the steer-  
ing wheel in place. If the lever is stiff,  
press the steering wheel lightly at the  
same time as you push the lever back.  
WARNING  
Adjust and secure the steering wheel before  
driving.  
With speed related power steering* the level  
of steering force can be adjusted, see  
page 121.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
           
03 Your driving environment  
Lighting  
Headlamp levelling  
Light switches  
The load in the car changes the vertical align-  
ment of the headlamp beam, which could  
dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by ad-  
justing the height of the beam. Lower the  
beam if the car is heavily laden.  
03  
1. Have the engine running or use ignition  
position I.  
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down  
raise/lower beam alignment.  
to  
Cars with Bi-Xenon headlamps and Active  
Bi-Xenon headlamps* have automatic head-  
lamp levelling and are not equipped with a  
thumbwheel.  
1
2
3
4
5
Overview, light switches  
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and  
instrument lighting  
Rear fog lamp  
Front fog lamps*  
Light switches  
Headlamp levelling  
Instrument lighting  
Different display and instrument lighting is  
switched on depending on ignition position.  
The display lighting is automatically sub-  
dued in darkness and the sensitivity is set  
with the thumbwheel  
.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is ad-  
justed with the thumbwheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
         
03 Your driving environment  
Lighting  
Dipped beam  
Active Bi-Xenon Lights*  
Main/dipped beam  
When the engine is started, dipped beam is  
activated automatically* if the headlamp con-  
trol is in position  
. If necessary, auto-  
matic dipped beam for this position can be  
deactivated by an authorised Volvo work-  
shop.  
1
2
03  
In position  
dipped beam is always acti-  
vated automatically when the engine is run-  
ning or with ignition position II.  
Main beam  
Main beam can only be activated when the  
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)  
and activated (right) respectively  
Headlamp control and stalk switch  
headlamp control is in position  
. Acti-  
vate/deactivate main beam by moving the  
Position  
Specification  
If the car is equipped with active headlamps  
(Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL) the light from  
the headlamps follows the steering wheel  
movement in order to provide maximum  
lighting in bends and junctions and so pro-  
vide increased safety.  
stalk switch to the end position  
the steering wheel and release.  
towards  
Automatic*/deactivated  
dipped beam. Only main  
beam flash.  
When main beam has been activated the  
symbol  
illuminates in the combined in-  
Position/parking lamps  
strument panel.  
Automatic dipped beam.  
Main beam and main beam  
flash work in this position.  
The function is activated automatically when  
the car is started. Following which, it can be  
Main beam flash  
Move the stalk switch gently to position  
toward the steering wheel. Main beam  
comes on until the stalk switch is released.  
deactivated/activated with the  
in the centre console.  
button  
NOTE  
The function is only active in twilight or dark-  
ness and only when the car is moving.  
Main beam can only be activated in  
position  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
     
03 Your driving environment  
Lighting  
Position/parking lamps  
Brake light  
Front fog lamps*  
The brake light automatically comes on dur-  
ing braking.  
Emergency brake light and automatic  
hazard warning flashers, EBL  
Emergency Brake Lights, EBL are activated  
in the event of heavy braking or if the ABS  
brakes are activated. This function means  
that the brake light flashes to immediately  
alert cars travelling behind.  
03  
The system is activated if ABS is used for  
more than 0.5 seconds or in the event of  
heavy braking, however, only at speeds  
above 50 km/h. When the speed of the car is  
lower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine  
normally again and the hazard warning flash-  
ers are switched on automatically. The haz-  
ard warning flashers remain on until the car is  
driven off again but can be deactivated with  
the button for hazard warning flashers.  
Headlamp control in position for position/park-  
ing lamps  
Button for front fog lamps  
The front fog lamps can be switched on  
along with main/dipped beam or the position  
lamps/parking lamps.  
Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi-  
tion (number plate lighting comes on at the  
same time).  
Press the button for on/off. The light in the  
button illuminates when the fog lamps are  
on.  
The lighting also comes on when the boot lid  
is opened in order to alert anybody behind.  
NOTE  
Regulations for using front fog lamps vary  
between different countries.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
     
03 Your driving environment  
Lighting  
Rear fog lamp  
Hazard warning flashers  
Direction indicators/flashers  
2
03  
Button for rear fog lamp  
Hazard warning flashers  
Direction indicators/flashers  
The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp  
and can only be switched on in combination  
with main/dipped beam or the front fog  
lamps.  
Press the button to activate the hazard warn-  
ing flashers. Both direction indicator symbols  
in the combined instrument panel flash when  
the hazard warning flashers are in use.  
Continuous flash sequence  
Move the stalk switch up or down to  
position  
.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is  
moved back manually, or automatically by  
the steering wheel movement.  
Press the button for on/off. The light in the  
button illuminates when the rear fog lamp is  
on.  
The hazard warning flashers are activated  
automatically when the car brakes so sud-  
denly that the emergency brake lights (EBL)  
are activated and speed is below 30 km/h.  
They remain on when the car has stopped  
and are deactivated automatically when the  
car is driven off again or the button is de-  
pressed.  
Short flash sequence  
Move the stalk switch up or down to  
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol  
on  
the combined instrument panel and the light  
in the button illuminate when the rear fog  
lamp is switched on.  
position  
and release. The direction indi-  
cators flash three times.  
Direction indicator symbols  
See page 54.  
NOTE  
Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary  
between different countries.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
         
03 Your driving environment  
Lighting  
Automatic lighting  
Rear roof lighting  
Interior lighting  
The passenger compartment lighting is  
switched on and off automatically when  
Front roof lighting  
button  
is in neutral position.  
The lighting comes on and remains on for  
30 seconds if:  
1
2
3
03  
• the car is unlocked from the outside with  
the key or remote control  
• the engine is switched off and the ignition  
is in position 0  
The lighting switches off when:  
Rear roof lighting  
• the engine is started.  
• the car is locked from outside  
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing  
each respective button.  
Controls for reading lamps and front roof lighting  
The lighting comes on and remains on for  
two minutes if one of the doors is open.  
Reading lamp, left-hand side, on/off  
Reading lamp, right-hand side, on/off  
Interior lighting  
Courtesy lighting/Step lighting*  
The courtesy lighting/step lighting is  
switched on/off automatically when one of  
the front doors is opened/closed.  
The passenger compartment lighting can be  
switched on and off manually within  
30 minutes from when the car is unlocked.  
The front reading lamps are controlled with  
If the lighting is switched on manually and the  
car is locked then it will be switched off auto-  
matically after one minute.  
the  
and  
buttons in the roof console.  
Glovebox lighting  
The glovebox lighting is switched on/off au-  
tomatically when its door is opened/closed.  
Switch  
has three positions for all passen-  
ger compartment lighting:  
• Off – right-hand side depressed, automat-  
ic lighting deactivated.  
• Neutral position – automatic lighting acti-  
vated.  
• On – left-hand side depressed, passenger  
compartment lighting on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
 
03 Your driving environment  
Lighting  
Home safe lighting  
Approach lighting  
Adjusting headlamp pattern  
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept  
switched on to work as home safe lighting af-  
ter the car has been locked.  
Approach lighting is switched on with the re-  
mote control key, see page 35, and is used  
to switch on the car’s lighting at a distance.  
1. Remove the remote control key from the  
ignition switch.  
When the function is activated with the re-  
mote control the parking lamps, indicator  
lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate light-  
ing, inner roof lamps and step lighting are il-  
luminated.  
03  
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward  
the steering wheel to the end position  
and release.  
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.  
The time for which the approach lighting can  
be kept switched on can be set under Car  
The time for which the home safe lighting can  
be kept switched on can be set under Car  
settings  
Light settings  
Approach  
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic  
settings  
Light settings  
Home safe  
lighting. For a description of the menu sys-  
tem, see page 94.  
lighting. For a description of the menu sys-  
tem, see page 94.  
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic  
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to  
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and be  
set for either right or left-hand traffic. The  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
         
03 Your driving environment  
Lighting  
correct pattern will also better illuminate the  
verge.  
The country in which the car is delivered de-  
termines whether position  
right or left-hand traffic.  
is designed for  
Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenon  
headlamps*  
Example 1  
If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall be  
driven in the UK then the headlamps should  
A
03  
be set to the adjusted position  
.
Example 2  
A car that is delivered in the UK is designed  
for left-hand traffic and is driven there with  
B
the headlamps in normal position  
.
Halogen headlamps  
The headlamp pattern for halogen head-  
lamps is readjusted by masking the head-  
lamp lens. The headlamp pattern may not be  
as good.  
Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pat-  
tern  
Masking the headlamps  
Normal position – the headlamp pattern  
is correct for the country in which the car  
was delivered.  
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand  
drive cars or the C and D templates for  
right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:2,  
for templates, see page 72. Use a photo-  
copier with a zoom function for example.  
Adapted position – designed for opposite  
headlamp pattern.  
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive  
waterproof material and cut it out. Also  
mark out the red dots.  
WARNING  
The headlamps must be handled with ex-  
treme care due to the Xenon lamp being  
supplied from a high-voltage unit.  
3. Position the self-adhesive templates so  
that the red dots correspond with the  
dots on the headlamp lenses that form  
reference points, see page 71.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
 
03 Your driving environment  
Lighting  
Masking the halogen headlamps  
03  
Masking left-hand drive cars  
Masking right-hand drive cars  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
 
03 Your driving environment  
Lighting  
Figures, halogen headlamps  
A
03  
LHD RIGHT  
B
D
RHD LEFT  
C
RHD RIGHT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
 
03 Your driving environment  
Wipers and washing  
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the  
Continuous wiping  
The wipers sweep at normal  
Windscreen wipers  
button  
. The windscreen wipers make  
one sweep.  
speed.  
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to  
make an extra sweep.  
The wipers sweep at high speed.  
0
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sen-  
sitivity and downward for lower sensitivity.  
(An extra sweep is made when the thum-  
bwheel is turned upward.)  
03  
IMPORTANT  
1
2
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers  
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-  
screen must be wet when the windscreen  
wipers are operating.  
Deactivating  
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the  
button  
to another wiper program.  
or move the stalk switch down  
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers  
Rain sensor*  
Rain sensor on/off  
The rain sensor automatically starts the  
windscreen wipers based on how much wa-  
ter it detects on the windscreen. The sensitiv-  
ity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using  
the thumbwheel.  
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated  
when the key is removed from the ignition  
switch or five minutes after the ignition is  
switched off.  
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency  
Windscreen wipers off  
Move the stalk switch to  
position 0 to switch off the wind-  
screen wipers.  
0
When the rain sensor is activated a light in  
the button the rain sensor symbol  
shown in the right-hand display in the com-  
bined instrument panel.  
IMPORTANT  
is  
The windscreen wipers could start and be  
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti-  
vate the rain sensor while the car is running  
or in ignition position I or II. The symbol in  
the combined instrument panel and the light  
in the button go out.  
Single sweep  
Raise the stalk switch and release  
to make one sweep.  
Activating and setting the sensitivity  
When activating the rain sensor, the car must  
be running or in ignition position I or II while  
the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in  
position 0.  
Intermittent wiping  
Set the number of sweeps per  
time unit with the thumbwheel  
when intermittent wiping is selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
     
03 Your driving environment  
Wipers and washing  
Heated washer nozzles*  
Headlamp washing and windscreen  
washing  
The washer nozzles are heated automatically  
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid  
freezing solid.  
High-pressure headlamp washing*  
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes  
a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,  
the headlamps are washed automatically  
every fifth time.  
03  
1
Washing function  
Operation  
Move the stalk switch toward the steering  
wheel  
to start the windscreen and head-  
lamp washers.  
After the stalk switch is released the wipers  
make several extra sweeps. The headlamps  
are washed alternately to prevent light inten-  
sity being reduced.  
NOTE  
One headlamp is washed at a time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
         
03 Your driving environment  
Windows, rearview and door mirrors  
WARNING  
General  
Power windows  
Laminated glass  
Make sure that children or other passengers  
are not in danger of becoming trapped in  
any way when closing the windows, in par-  
ticular when the remote control key is used.  
1
2
3
The glass is reinforced which pro-  
vides better protection against  
break-ins and improved sound in-  
sulation in the passenger compart-  
ment. The windscreen and side win-  
03  
WARNING  
dows* have laminated glass.  
If there are children in the car:  
Remember to always switch off the supply  
to the power windows by removing the re-  
mote control key if the driver leaves the car.  
Water and dirt-repellent coating*  
The front side windows and/or door  
mirrors are treated with a coating that  
improves the view in difficult weather condi-  
tions. Maintenance, see page 210.  
Driver’s door control panel  
Door mirrors  
Switch for electric child safety locks* and  
disengaging rear power window buttons,  
see page 31.  
In certain weather conditions, the function of  
the dirt-repellent coating is improved if the  
door mirror defrosters are used.  
Rear window controls  
Front window controls  
Heat the door mirrors:  
• if they are covered with ice or snow  
• in heavy rain and dirty road conditions  
• if they are misted.  
WARNING  
Check that none of the rear seat passen-  
gers is in danger of becoming trapped in  
any way caught when closing the windows  
from the driver’s door.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove  
ice from the windows. The water and dirt-  
repellent coating could be damaged. Use  
the defroster to remove ice from the mirrors.  
An ice scraper could scratch the mirror  
glass!  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
             
03 Your driving environment  
Windows, rearview and door mirrors  
Closing of the windows is stopped and the  
1. Gently raise the front section of the button  
to raise the window to its end position and  
hold it there for one second.  
Operating  
window is opened if anything prevents its  
movement. It is possible to force the pinch  
protection when closing has been interrupt-  
ed, e.g. with ice, by continuously holding the  
button up until the window is closed. The  
pinch protection is reactivated after a brief  
pause.  
2. Release the button briefly.  
3. Raise the front section of the button  
again for one second.  
2
1
03  
WARNING  
1
2
Operating without auto  
Resetting must be carried out to ensure that  
pinch protection works.  
Move one of the controls up/down gently.  
The power windows move up/down as long  
as the control is held in position.  
Operating the power windows  
Operating with auto  
Move one of the controls up/down to the end  
position and release it. The window runs au-  
tomatically to its end position.  
Operating without auto  
Operating with auto  
All power windows can be operated using  
the control panel in the driver’s door. Each  
control panel in the other doors can only con-  
trol its own respective power window. The  
power windows can only be controlled with  
one control panel at a time.  
Remote control and central locking but-  
tons  
All side windows can be opened/closed au-  
tomatically with the remote control or the  
central locking buttons:  
Press and hold the lock button until the win-  
dows start to open/close. To interrupt open-  
ing/closing, press the lock button again.  
In order that the power windows can be used  
the car must be in ignition position I or II. Af-  
ter the car has been running the power win-  
dows can be operated for several minutes  
even when the remote control key has been  
removed, but not however after the door has  
been opened.  
Resetting  
If the battery is disconnected then the func-  
tion for automatic opening must be reset so  
that it can work correctly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
 
Windows, rearview and door mirrors  
press the L or R button. The door mirror re-  
sets when reverse gear is disengaged.  
Retractable power door mirrors*  
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv-  
ing in narrow spaces:  
Door mirrors  
Automatic retraction when locking  
When the car is locked/unlocked with the re-  
mote control key the door mirrors are auto-  
matically retracted/extended.  
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the  
same time.  
2. Release them after approximately one  
second. The mirrors automatically stop  
in the fully retracted position.  
03  
The function can be activated/deactivated  
under Car settings  
Retract mirrors when  
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L  
and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors  
automatically stop in the fully extended posi-  
tion.  
locking. For a description of the menu sys-  
tem, see page 94.  
Resetting to neutral  
Mirrors that have been moved out of position  
by an external force must be electrically reset  
to the neutral position for electric retracting/  
extending to work.  
Door mirror controls  
Storing the position*  
Adjusting  
The mirror positions are stored in the key  
memory when the car has been locked with  
the remote control key. When the car is un-  
locked with the same remote control the mir-  
rors and the driver’s seat adopt the stored  
positions when the driver’s door is opened.  
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door  
mirror or the R button for the right-hand  
door mirror. The light in the button illumi-  
nates.  
• Retract the mirrors with the L and R  
buttons.  
• Fold them out again with the L and R  
buttons.  
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in  
the centre.  
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.  
The function can be activated/deactivated  
3. Press the L or R button again. The light  
should no longer be on.  
under Car key memory  
Seat & mirror po-  
Home safe and approach lighting  
The light on the door mirrors illuminates  
when approach lighting or home safe lighting  
is selected, see page 69.  
sitions. For a description of the menu sys-  
tem, see page 94.  
WARNING  
Angling the door mirror when parking*  
The door mirror can be angled down for the  
driver to view the side of the road when park-  
ing for example. Engage reverse gear and  
The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti-  
mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur-  
ther away than they actually are.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
           
03 Your driving environment  
Windows, rearview and door mirrors  
Rear window and door mirror  
defrosters  
Interior rearview mirror  
03  
1
Manual dimming  
Use the defroster to quickly remove misting  
and ice from the rear window and the door  
mirrors.  
Bright light from behind could be reflected in  
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use  
dimming when disturbed by light from be-  
hind.  
Press the button once to start simultaneous  
rear window and door mirror defrosting. The  
light in the button indicates that the function  
is active. Defrosting is deactivated automati-  
cally and its duration is controlled by the out-  
side temperature.  
Dipping  
Control for dimming  
Normal position  
Dimmed position.  
The rear window is demisted/defrosted auto-  
matically if the car is started in an outside  
temperature lower than +7 C.  
Automatic dimming*  
Bright light from behind is automatically  
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control  
is not available in mirrors with automatic  
dimming.  
Defrosting can be selected under Climate  
settings  
Auto. rear defroster. Select be-  
tween On or Off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
     
03 Your driving environment  
Power sunroof*  
roof moves to maximum open position as  
long as the button is kept depressed.  
Vertical opening  
General  
The sunroof controls are located in the roof  
panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically  
and horizontally. Ignition position I or II is re-  
quired for the sunroof to be opened.  
Closing  
Close manually by pressing the control for-  
ward to the point of resistance . The sun-  
roof moves to closed position as long as the  
button is kept depressed.  
03  
Horizontal opening  
5
WARNING  
6
The sunroof’s pinch-protection function  
only operates during automatic closing, not  
manual. Make sure that hands are clear  
when closing the sunroof.  
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge  
Opening: open by pressing the rear edge  
of the control upward.  
Close automatically by pressing the control  
1
2
to position  
and then release it.  
3
4
Closing: close by pressing the rear edge  
of the control downward.  
The power supply to the sunroof is switched  
off by removing the remote control key from  
the ignition switch.  
Horizontal opening, backward/forward  
Opening, automatic  
Opening, manual  
Closing, manual  
WARNING  
If there are children in the car:  
Remember to always switch off the power  
supply to the sunroof by removing the re-  
mote control key if the driver leaves the car.  
Closing, automatic  
Opening  
For maximum sunroof opening, move the  
control back to position  
Open manually by pulling the control back-  
ward to the point of resistance . The sun-  
and release.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
           
03 Your driving environment  
Power sunroof*  
Closing using the remote control key or  
central locking button  
Pinch protection  
The sunroof’s pinch protection function is  
triggered if it is blocked by an object during  
automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will  
stop and automatically open to the previous  
position.  
03  
Press and hold the lock button for  
2 seconds. The sunroof and windows close.  
The doors lock. To interrupt closing, press  
the lock button again.  
WARNING  
If the sunroof is closed using the remote  
control key, check that no one is in danger  
of getting hands caught.  
Sunscreen  
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interi-  
or sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back au-  
tomatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip  
the handle and slide the screen forward to  
close it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
   
03 Your driving environment  
Starting the engine  
Steering lock  
The steering lock is deactivated when the re-  
Petrol and diesel engines  
WARNING  
1. For cars with remote control key, insert  
the remote control key into the ignition  
switch. Gently push it forward until it is  
pulled in.  
Never remove the remote control key from  
the ignition switch while driving or when the  
car is being towed. The steering lock could  
be activated which would mean that the car  
cannot be steered. Never remove the re-  
mote control key with keyless drive* func-  
tion from the car while driving or during  
towing.  
mote control key is inserted into the ignition  
2
switch and activated when the remote con-  
trol key is removed from the ignition switch.  
1
Activate the steering lock when leaving the  
car to reduce the risk of car theft.  
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed .  
Depress the brake pedal in cars with  
automatic gearbox.  
03  
3. Press the START/STOP button and re-  
lease the button.  
n
The starter motor works until the engine has  
started, but for no longer than 10 seconds  
(diesel up to 60 seconds). If the engine has  
not started after 10 seconds try again by  
holding in the START/STOP button until the  
engine starts.  
NOTE  
The idling speed can be noticeably higher  
than normal for certain engine types during  
cold starting. This is so that the emissions  
system can reach normal operating temper-  
ature as quickly as possible, which minimis-  
es exhaust emissions and protects the  
environment.  
WARNING  
Always remove the remote control key from  
the ignition switch when leaving the car, es-  
pecially if there are children in the car.  
Keyless drive*  
Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and diesel  
engines.  
NOTE  
One precondition for starting the car is that  
the car’s remote control keys with the key-  
less drive* function are located inside the  
passenger compartment or the cargo area.  
2
On cars with Keyless drive* the steering lock  
is deactivated when the start button is  
pressed in for the first time. The steering lock  
is activated when the engine is started and  
the driver’s door is opened.  
1
If the car is moving then it is enough to press  
the START/STOP button to start the car.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
             
03 Your driving environment  
Starting the engine  
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the  
Diesel particle filter (DPF)  
car until the engine reaches normal operating  
temperature, preferably on a main road or  
motorway. The car should then be driven for  
approximately 20 minutes more.  
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,  
which results in more efficient emission con-  
trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are  
collected in the filter during normal driving.  
So-called "regeneration" is started in order to  
burn away the particles and empty the filter.  
This requires the engine to have reached nor-  
mal operating temperature.  
When regeneration is complete the warning  
text is cleared automatically.  
03  
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so  
that the engine reaches normal operating  
temperature more quickly.  
Regeneration of the filter takes place auto-  
matically at an interval of approximately  
300–900 km depending on driving condi-  
tions. Regeneration normally takes between  
10 and 20 minutes. During this time fuel con-  
sumption may increase slightly.  
IMPORTANT  
If the filter fills up with particles then it can  
be difficult to start the engine and the filter  
will be incapable of functioning. Then there  
is a risk that the filter will have to be re-  
placed.  
Regeneration in cold weather  
If the car is frequently driven short distances  
in cold weather then the engine does not  
reach normal operating temperature. This  
means that regeneration of the diesel particle  
filter does not take place and the filter is not  
emptied.  
When the filter has become approximately  
80% full of particles, a yellow warning trian-  
gle illuminates on the dashboard, and a mes-  
sage is shown, Soot filter full. See manual is  
shown on the dashboard display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
   
03 Your driving environment  
Starting the engine  
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the  
battery in your car and remove the  
cover, see page 187.  
comes into contact with the battery’s  
positive terminal or the clamp connect-  
ed to the red jump lead.  
Jump starting  
4
6. Connect the starter cable to the positive  
2
terminal  
on the battery in your car,  
located under a folding plastic cover.  
WARNING  
03  
7. Connect one clamp from the black jump  
lead to the donor battery’s negative  
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas,  
which is highly explosive. One spark, which  
can be generated if you connect a jump  
lead incorrectly, is sufficient to make the  
battery explode. The battery contains sul-  
phuric acid, which can cause serious burns.  
If the acid comes into contact with eyes,  
skin or clothing, flush with large quantities  
of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek  
medical attention immediately.  
terminal  
.
+
-
8. Connect the other clamp to an earthing  
point, (right-hand engine mounting at  
1
3
the top, the outer screw head)  
.
Check that the jump lead clamps are fixed  
securely so that there are no sparks during  
the starting procedure.  
If the battery is flat then the car can be start-  
ed with current from another battery.  
The following points are recommended when  
using a donor battery in order to avoid the  
risk of an explosion:  
IMPORTANT  
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid  
short circuits with other components in the  
engine compartment.  
1. Turn the car’s ignition to position 0, see  
page 59.  
9. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let  
the engine run a few minutes at a speed  
slightly higher than idle (1500 rpm).  
2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt.  
3. If the donor battery is in another car,  
switch off the donor car’s engine in the  
other car and ensure that the cars do  
not touch one another.  
10.Start the engine of the car with the flat  
battery. Do not touch the crocodile clips  
during the start procedure. There is a  
risk of sparks forming.  
4. Connect the red jump lead to the posi-  
tive terminal on the donor battery  
.
11.Remove the jump leads, first the black  
and then the red. Make sure that none  
of the clamps on the black jump lead  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
   
03 Your driving environment  
Gearboxes  
Reverse gear inhibitor  
Manual gearbox  
Automatic gearbox  
03  
Only engage reverse gear when the car is  
stationary.  
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each  
gear change. Take your foot off the clutch  
pedal between gear changes. Follow the  
shifting pattern indicated.  
Parking position (P)  
Select P when starting the engine or when  
the car is parked. The brake pedal must be  
depressed to disengage the gear selector  
from the P position. The gearbox is mechani-  
cally blocked when P is engaged. Always ap-  
ply the parking brake when parking the car or  
press the button if the car is equipped with  
electric parking brake, see page 89.  
For the best possible fuel economy, use the  
highest gear possible as often as possible.  
IMPORTANT  
The car must be stationary when position P  
is selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
               
03 Your driving environment  
Gearboxes  
The gear selector can be moved freely be-  
Reverse (R)  
Safety functions  
tween N and D. Other positions are locked  
The car must be stationary when position R  
is selected.  
When kickdown is activated the car can  
change one or more gears at a time depend-  
ing on engine speed. The car changes up  
when the engine reaches its maximum speed  
in order to prevent damage to the engine.  
with a latch that is released with the inhibitor  
button on the gear selector. The gear selec-  
tor can be moved between R, N and D after  
pressing the inhibitor button.  
Neutral position (N)  
No gear is engaged and the engine can be  
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is  
stationary with the gear selector in position  
N.  
03  
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the  
driver allows the speed to decrease lower  
than a level suitable for the selected gear, in  
order to avoid jerking and stalling.  
Automatic gear selector inhibitor  
The automatic gearbox has special safety  
systems:  
Drive (D)  
Keylock  
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/  
kickdown which would result in an engine  
speed high enough to damage the engine.  
Nothing happens if the driver tries to shift  
down in this way at high engine speed. The  
original gear remains engaged.  
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up  
and down takes place automatically based  
on the level of acceleration and speed. The  
car must be stationary when the gear selec-  
tor is moved to position D from position R.  
To remove the remote control key from the  
ignition switch, the gear selector must be in  
the P position. The remote control key is  
locked in all other positions.  
Parking position (P)  
Stationary car with engine running:  
Geartronic – manual gear positions  
To move from the drive D to a manual posi-  
tion, move the gear selector to position M. To  
go from position M to the automatic driving  
position D, move the selector to position D.  
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor  
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when  
moving the gear selector to another position.  
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Park-  
ing position (P)  
To be able to move the gear selector from P  
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must  
be depressed and the ignition must be in po-  
sition II, see page 81.  
Manual gear position, M, can be selected at  
any time during the journey. Then move the  
gear selector to to change down a gear.  
The car engine-brakes and the accelerator  
pedal is released. Move the gear selector to  
+ to change up a gear.  
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)  
If the gear selector is in the N position and  
the car has been stationary for at least  
The selected gear is indicated on the com-  
bined instrument panel, see page 54.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
         
03 Your driving environment  
Gearboxes  
3 seconds (irrespective of whether the en-  
gine is running) then the gear selector is  
locked.  
Fully insert the key blade. Press the key  
blade down and keep it held down. Move  
the gear selector from the P position. For  
information on the key blade, see  
page 34.  
All Wheel Drive – AWD*  
All Wheel Drive is always engaged. All Wheel  
Drive means that the car is driving all four  
wheels at the same time. The power is auto-  
matically distributed between the front and  
rear wheels. An electronically controlled  
clutch system distributes the power to the  
wheels that have the best grip on the current  
road surface. This provides the best traction  
and prevents wheel spin. Under normal driv-  
ing conditions, the majority of power is trans-  
mitted to the front wheels. All Wheel Drive  
improves driving safety in rain, snow and icy  
conditions.  
To be able to move the gear selector from N  
to another gear position, the brake pedal  
must be depressed and the ignition must be  
in position II, see page 81.  
03  
Deactivating the automatic gear  
selector inhibitor  
2
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat  
battery, the gear selector must be moved  
from the P position so that the car can be  
moved.  
Lift away the rubber mat on the floor  
behind the centre console and open the  
hatch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
     
03 Your driving environment  
Foot brake  
swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibra-  
tion may be felt in the brake pedal when this  
is engaged and this is normal.  
General  
NOTE  
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If  
one brake circuit is damaged then this will  
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper lev-  
el and harder pressure on the pedal is need-  
ed to produce the normal braking effect.  
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-  
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)  
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the  
brake pedal is released then all braking  
ceases.  
After the engine has been started and the car  
has reached 20 km/h there is a short auto-  
matic test of the ABS system. The test may  
be felt as pulses in the brake pedal.  
03  
The driver’s brake pedal pressure is rein-  
forced by a brake servo.  
Cleaning the brake discs  
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs  
may result in delayed brake function. This  
delay is minimised by cleaning the brake lin-  
ings.  
WARNING  
The brake servo only works when the en-  
gine is running.  
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road  
surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after  
the car has been washed. Carry this out by  
braking gently during a short period while en  
route.  
If the brake is used when the engine is  
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and  
more force must be used to brake the car.  
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a  
heavy load the brakes can be relieved by us-  
ing engine braking. Engine braking is most  
efficiently used if the same gear is used  
downhill as up.  
Emergency Brake Assistance*  
Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) helps to  
increase brake force and so reduce braking  
distance. The EBA system detects the driv-  
er’s braking style and increases brake force  
as necessary. The brake force can be rein-  
forced up to the level when the ABS system  
is engaged. The EBA function is interrupted  
when the pressure on the brake pedal is re-  
duced.  
For more general information on heavy loads  
on the car, see page 218.  
Anti-lock braking system  
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock  
Braking System) that prevents the wheels  
from locking during braking. This means the  
ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
       
03 Your driving environment  
Foot brake  
Symbols in the combined instrument  
panel  
Symbol Specification  
Constant glow – Check the brake  
fluid level. If the level is low, fill  
with brake fluid and check for the  
cause of the brake fluid loss.  
03  
Constant glow for two seconds  
when the engine is started –  
There was a fault in the brake  
system’s ABS function when the  
engine was last running.  
WARNING  
If  
and  
illuminate at the same time  
then a fault may have arisen in the brake  
system.  
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor-  
mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near-  
est authorised Volvo workshop and have  
the brake system checked.  
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the  
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further be-  
fore topping up the brake fluid.  
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must  
be investigated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
 
03 Your driving environment  
Parking brake  
5. When parking the vehicle always put the  
Parking brake, manual  
Parking brake, electric*  
gear selector in position 1 (for manual  
transmission) or P (for automatic trans-  
mission).  
An electric parking brake has the same appli-  
cations as a manual parking brake, e.g. when  
starting uphill.  
2
Parking on a hill  
If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the  
wheels away from the kerb.  
Function  
03  
A faint electric motor noise can be heard  
when the parking brake is being applied. The  
noise can also be heard during the automatic  
function checking of the parking brake.  
If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the  
wheels towards the kerb.  
1
If the car is stationary when the parking brake  
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.  
If it is applied when the car is moving then  
the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake  
acts on all four wheels. Brake function  
changes over to the rear wheels when the car  
is almost stationary.  
How to release the parking brake  
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.  
The parking brake is located far left  
.
2. Pull the control  
.
NOTE  
The warning symbol in the combined instru-  
ment panel illuminates irrespective of how  
hard the parking brake pedal is depressed.  
Low battery voltage  
If the battery voltage is too low then the park-  
ing brake can neither be released nor ap-  
plied. Connect a donor battery if the battery  
voltage is too low, see page 83.  
How to apply the parking brake  
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.  
2. Depress the parking brake pedal  
firmly as far as possible.  
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make  
sure that the car is at a standstill posi-  
tion.  
4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake  
pedal must be depressed further.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
         
03 Your driving environment  
Parking brake  
Cars with manual gearbox  
How to apply the parking brake  
NOTE  
Releasing manually  
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition  
switch.  
In the event of emergency braking at  
speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds  
during the braking procedure.  
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.  
3. Pull the control.  
Parking on a hill  
03  
If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the  
wheels away from the kerb.  
NOTE  
The parking brake can also be released  
manually by depressing the clutch pedal in-  
stead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom-  
mends the use of the brake pedal.  
If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the  
wheels towards the kerb.  
How to release the parking brake  
Parking brake control  
Releasing automatically  
1. Start the engine.  
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.  
2. Press the control.  
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make  
sure that the car is at a standstill posi-  
tion.  
2. Ease up the clutch and depress the  
accelerator.  
4. When parking the vehicle always put the  
gear selector in position 1 (for manual  
transmission) or P (for automatic trans-  
mission).  
IMPORTANT  
The parking brake can also be released au-  
tomatically when the gear selector is in neu-  
tral position if the engine is running.  
The symbol  
in the combined instrument  
panel flashes until the parking brake is fully  
applied. When the symbol illuminates the  
parking brake is applied.  
Parking brake control  
In an emergency the parking brake can be  
applied when the vehicle is moving by hold-  
ing in the control. When the control is re-  
leased or the accelerator pedal is depressed  
the braking is interrupted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
03 Your driving environment  
Parking brake  
Parking brake not fully released – A fault is  
Cars with automatic gearbox  
Cars with Keyless drive* function  
Release manually by pressing the START/  
STOP button, then depress the brake or  
clutch pedal and pull the control.  
preventing the parking brake from being re-  
leased. Contact an authorised Volvo work-  
shop. A warning signal sounds if you pull  
away with this error message.  
Releasing manually  
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition  
switch.  
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.  
3. Pull the control.  
Symbols  
Parking brake not applied – A fault is pre-  
venting the parking brake from being applied.  
Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo  
workshop if the message remains.  
03  
Symbol Specification  
Releasing automatically  
1. Start the engine.  
Read the message on the infor-  
mation display  
(P)!  
2. Put on the seatbelt.  
A flashing symbol indicates  
that the parking brake is  
applied.  
If the symbol flashes in any  
other situation then this means  
that a fault has arisen. Read the  
message on the information  
display.  
The message is also illuminated on cars with  
manual gearbox when the car is driven at low  
speed with the door open in order to alert the  
driver that the parking brake may have been  
unintentionally disengaged.  
3. Move the gear selector to position D  
or R and depress the accelerator.  
NOTE  
For safety reasons, the parking brake is only  
released automatically if the engine is run-  
ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt.  
The parking brake is released immediately  
on cars with automatic gearbox when the  
accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear  
selector is in position D or R.  
Parking brake Service required – A fault has  
arisen. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault  
remains.  
Messages  
If the car has to be parked before the fault  
has been rectified then the wheels must be  
turned as if parking on a hill and the gear  
selector must be in position 1 (manual  
gearbox) or P (automatic gearbox).  
Heavy load uphill  
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the  
car to roll backward when the parking brake  
is released automatically on a steep incline.  
Avoid this by holding in the control while pull-  
ing away. Release the control when the en-  
gine engages the traction point.  
Replacing the brake linings  
The rear brake linings must be replaced by  
an authorised Volvo workshop due to the de-  
sign of the electric parking brake.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
Menus and messages.............................................................................. 94  
Climate control......................................................................................... 99  
Audio system ......................................................................................... 109  
Trip computer......................................................................................... 118  
Compass*............................................................................................... 119  
Stability and traction control system ..................................................... 120  
Adapting driving characteristics ............................................................ 121  
Cruise control* ....................................................................................... 122  
Adaptive cruise control*......................................................................... 123  
Collision warning system with  
brake support* ....................................................................................... 127  
Parking assistance*................................................................................ 130  
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS* ................................................... 132  
Comfort inside the  
passenger compartment........................................................................ 135  
Bluetooth handsfree* ............................................................................. 140  
Built-in phone* ....................................................................................... 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE  
04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Menus and messages  
EXIT – leads back one step in the menu  
structure. A long press leads out from the  
menu system.  
settings, which is on the assumption that the  
following is carried out beforehand:  
Centre console  
Some functions are controlled from the cen-  
tre console via the menu system or via the  
keypad in the steering wheel. Each function  
is described under its respective section.  
1. Press MENU.  
2. Scroll to Menu and press ENTER.  
3. Scroll to Submenu and press ENTER.  
Steering wheel keypad  
The current menu level is shown at the top  
right of the centre console’s display.  
The navigation button can be used instead of  
ENTER and EXIT when navigating the menu  
hierarchy. The right-hand arrow is equal to  
ENTER and the left-hand arrow to EXIT.  
1
2
Centre console controls  
3
04  
The menu options are numbered and can  
also be selected directly with the numerical  
keypad (only 1 – 9).  
ENTER*  
3
4
EXIT*  
1
2
Navigation buttons – up/down.  
If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER and  
EXIT then the buttons  
same function as in the centre console.  
to  
have the  
Centre console with information display and  
controls for menus.  
Search paths  
Navigation button – scrolls and selects  
among menu options  
Access to some functions is provided direct-  
ly via the function buttons and some are  
reached via the menu system.  
ENTER – selects menu options  
MENU – leads to the menu system  
Search paths to the menu system functions  
are stated in the form: Car settings  
Lock  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
       
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Menus and messages  
Main menu AM  
Audio settings  
Main menu CD  
Random  
Menu overview  
1
The phone and audio sources have different  
main menus. The following menus are includ-  
ed in all main menus:  
Sound stage  
Off  
2
Equalizer, front  
Folder  
Disc2  
Car key memory  
Equalizer, rear  
Seat & mirror positions*  
3
Single disc  
Auto. volume control  
Reset the audio settings  
All discs3  
CD settings  
Disc text*  
Car settings  
Fold mirr. when locking*  
Main menu FM  
04  
Collision warn. settings*  
Information  
FM settings  
News  
News  
Light settings  
TP (Traffic information)  
Audio settings  
TP (Traffic information)  
Lock settings  
Radio text  
Parking camera settings*  
Steering force level*  
PTY (Programme type)  
Advanced radio settings  
Audio settings  
Main menu AUX  
Volume, AUX input  
Audio settings  
Climate control settings  
Automatic blower adjust  
Auto. rear defroster  
Recirculation timer  
Reset climate settings  
2
Only in systems where it is possible to play-  
back audio files in MP3 and WMA formats.  
1
The menu option for audio settings is available  
in all audio sources.  
3
Only in systems with CD changer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Menus and messages  
Main menu Built-in phone  
Call list  
Voice mail number  
Diversions  
Main menu Bluetooth  
Last 10 missed calls  
Last 10 missed calls  
Last 10 received calls  
Last 10 dialled calls  
Phone book  
Phone settings  
Network selection  
SIM security  
Last 10 received calls  
Last 10 dialled calls  
Erase list  
Search  
Edit PIN code  
Sounds and volume  
IDIS  
Call duration  
Phone book  
New contact  
Search  
Copy fr. mobile phone  
Bluetooth*  
04  
Connect the phone  
Change phone  
Reset Phone settings  
Copy all  
Remove phone  
Phone settings  
Call options  
Erase SIM  
Erase phone  
Memory status  
Messages  
Sounds and volume  
Synchronize phone book  
Read  
Write new  
Message settings  
Call options  
Send my number  
Call waiting  
Automatic answer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Menus and messages  
Message  
1
Combined instrument panel  
Menu overview  
To empty fuel tank  
Average  
Current consumption  
Average speed  
1
2
3
Lane departure warning  
Tyre pressure Calibration  
Current speed  
04  
o
Park heat timer AM/PM  
Park vent timer AM/PM  
Park timer mode  
_3C  
P
Information display and controls for menus  
Text message in the information display.  
READ – access to message list and  
message confirmation.  
When a warning, information or indicator  
symbol illuminates, a corresponding mes-  
sage appears on the information display. An  
error message is stored in a memory list until  
the fault is rectified.  
Direct start Park heat  
Direct start Park el.heat  
Direct start Park vent  
Additional heat auto  
Rest heat start  
Thumbwheel – browse between menu  
options.  
RESET – reset the active function. Used  
in certain cases to select/activate a func-  
tion, see the explanation under each re-  
spective function.  
Press READ to acknowledge and browse  
between the messages.  
The menus shown on the information dis-  
plays in the combined instrument panel are  
controlled with the left-hand stalk switch.  
The menus shown depend on ignition posi-  
tion. If a message appears then this must be  
acknowledged with READ for the menus to  
be shown.  
DSTC  
NOTE  
If a warning message appears while you are  
using the trip computer, the message must  
be read (press READ) before the previous  
activity can be resumed.  
1
Certain menu options are optional  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
         
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Menus and messages  
Message  
Stop safely  
Specification  
Message  
Specification  
Stop and switch off the  
engine. Serious risk of  
damage. Contact an  
authorised Volvo  
Time for regular Time for regular service  
service  
at an authorised Volvo  
workshop. The timing is  
determined by the  
number of kilometres  
driven, number of  
workshop.  
months since the last  
service, engine running  
time and oil grade.  
Stopping the  
engine  
Stop and switch off the  
engine. Serious risk of  
damage. Contact an  
authorised Volvo  
04  
workshop.  
Maintenance  
overdue  
If the service intervals  
are not followed then the  
warranty does not cover  
any damaged parts.  
Contact an authorised  
Volvo workshop for  
service.  
Service urgent  
Have the car checked by  
an authorised Volvo  
workshop immediately.  
Service required Have the car checked by  
an authorised Volvo  
Temporarily OFF A function has been  
temporarily switched off  
and is reset automati-  
workshop as soon as  
possible.  
cally while driving or  
after starting again.  
See manual  
Read the owner’s  
manual.  
Power save  
mode  
The audio system is  
switched off to save  
energy. Charge the  
battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Climate control  
• The humidity sensor* is located in the  
the air conditioning is temporarily shut-off.  
There may be a temporary increase in tem-  
perature.  
General  
interior rearview mirror.  
Air conditioning  
NOTE  
The car is equipped with Electronic Climate  
Control (ECC). The climate control system  
cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air  
in the passenger compartment.  
Condensation  
Do not cover or block the sensors with  
clothing or other objects.  
In warm weather, condensation from the air  
conditioning may drip under the car. This is  
normal.  
Side windows and sunroof  
NOTE  
To ensure that the air conditioning works op-  
timally, the side windows, and sunroof if ap-  
propriate, should be closed.  
Ice and snow  
Remove ice and snow from the climate con-  
trol system air intake (the grille between the  
bonnet and the windscreen).  
The air conditioning can be switched off,  
but to ensure the best possible climate  
comfort in the passenger compartment and  
to prevent the windows from misting, it  
should always be on.  
04  
Misting windows  
Fault tracing and repair  
Remove misting on the insides of the win-  
dows by primarily using the defroster func-  
tion.  
Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate  
control system to an authorised Volvo work-  
shop only.  
Actual temperature  
The temperature you select corresponds to  
the physical experience with reference to  
factors such as air speed, humidity and solar  
radiation in and around the car.  
To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win-  
dows with a normal window cleaning agent.  
Refrigerant  
The climate control system contains R134a  
refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-  
rine, which means that it is harmless to the  
ozone layer. Have an authorised Volvo work-  
shop carry out the filling/changing of refriger-  
ant.  
Vents in the parcel shelf  
NOTE  
Sensor location  
• The sun sensor is located on the top side  
of the dashboard.  
To avoid misting, do not block the vents fur-  
thest back on the parcel shelf with clothing  
or other objects.  
• The temperature sensor for the passenger  
compartment is located below the climate  
control panel.  
Total airing function  
The function opens/closes all side windows  
simultaneously and can be used for example  
to quickly air the car during hot weather, see  
page 35.  
Temporary shut-off of the air condi-  
tioning  
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for  
full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer,  
• The outside temperature sensor is located  
on the door mirror.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
                   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Climate control  
es until the car is four years old. Then the  
Passenger compartment filter  
Menu settings  
enhanced fan function is disengaged  
completely as the fan no longer has any  
functionality with regard to the cleanliness  
of the passenger compartment air.  
All air entering the car’s passenger compart-  
ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be re-  
placed at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo  
Service Programme for the recommended  
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a  
severely contaminated environment, it may  
be necessary to replace the filter more often.  
It is possible to change the default settings  
for three of the climate control system’s func-  
tions via the centre console, see page 94:  
• Fan speed in automatic mode, see  
page 103.  
• Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). A fully  
automatic system that cleans the air in the  
passenger compartment from contami-  
nants such as particles, hydrocarbons,  
nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.  
• Recirculation timer for passenger com-  
partment air, see page 104.  
• Automatic rear window defrosting, see  
page 78.  
NOTE  
• Use of tested materials in the interior  
equipment. The materials have been de-  
veloped in order to minimise the quantity  
of dust in the passenger compartment and  
they contribute to making the passenger  
compartment easier to keep clean. The  
carpets in both the passenger compart-  
ment and the cargo area are removable  
and easy to remove and clean. Use clean-  
ing agents and car care products recom-  
mended by Volvo, see page 211.  
04  
There are different types of passenger com-  
partment filter. Make sure that the correct  
filter is fitted.  
All climate control system functions are set to  
original position with RESET via the display.  
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*  
This option keeps the passenger compart-  
ment clear of allergy and asthma inducing  
substances. For more information, see the  
Clean Zone Interior brochure included when  
the car is purchased. The following is includ-  
ed:  
NOTE  
• An enhanced fan function that means that  
the fan starts when the car is opened with  
the remote control key. The fan fills the  
passenger compartment with fresh air.  
The function starts when required and is  
disengaged automatically after a time or  
when one of the passenger compartment  
doors is opened. The time interval during  
which the fan operates gradually decreas-  
In cars with the Clean Zone Interior Pack-  
age the IAQS air filter must be replaced eve-  
ry 15 000 km or once per year. In cars  
without the Clean Zone Interior Package the  
IAQS air filter must be replaced at the nor-  
mal service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Climate control  
Air vents in the dashboard  
Air vents in the door pillars  
Air distribution  
A
B
D
C
C
D
04  
Open  
Open  
The incoming air is divided between  
20 different vents in the passenger compart-  
ment.  
Closed  
Closed  
Lateral airflow  
Vertical airflow  
Lateral airflow  
Vertical airflow  
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO  
mode.  
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to  
remove misting.  
Aim the vents at the windows to remove  
misting.  
If necessary it can be controlled manually,  
see page 105.  
A certain air flow always comes from the  
vents in order to maintain a good climate in  
the passenger compartment. The vents adja-  
cent to the steering wheel can be used to  
warm up hands in cold weather.  
Aim the vents into the passenger compart-  
ment to maintain a comfortable climate in the  
rear seat.  
Remember that small children may be sensi-  
tive to air flows and draughts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Climate control  
Press the button four times to switch off the  
function – no lamps illuminate.  
Ventilated front seats*  
Electronic climate control, ECC  
The ventilation system consists of fans in the  
seats and backrests that draw air through the  
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases  
the cooler the passenger compartment air  
becomes.  
NOTE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
The seat ventilation should be used careful-  
ly by people sensitive to draughts. Comfort  
level one is recommended for long-term  
use.  
The ventilation is controlled from the ECC  
which takes into account the seat tempera-  
ture, solar radiation and outside temperature.  
8
13  
IMPORTANT  
The ventilation can be used at the same time  
as seat heating. For example, the function  
can be used to dry damp from clothing.  
11 10  
9
12  
04  
The seat ventilation cannot be started when  
passenger compartment temperature is  
less than 5 C. This is to avoid chilling any-  
one sitting in the seat.  
Ventilated front seats*, left-hand side  
Fan  
The ventilation system can be activated  
when the engine is running. There are three  
comfort levels that produce different cooling  
and dehumidification outputs:  
Heated front seats, left-hand side  
Air distribution  
Fan  
Turn the knob to increase or  
decrease fan speed. If  
AUTO is selected then fan  
speed is regulated auto-  
matically. The previously  
set fan speed is disen-  
gaged.  
• Comfort level three: press the button once  
for maximum output – three lamps illumi-  
nate.  
Heated front seats, right-hand side  
AUTO  
Ventilated front seats*, right-hand side  
Temperature control, right-hand side  
A/C – On/Off  
• Comfort level two: press the button twice  
for a lower output – two lamps illuminate.  
• Comfort level one: press the button three  
times for the lowest output – one lamp  
illuminates.  
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,  
see page 78  
NOTE  
Defroster  
If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi-  
tioning is not engaged.  
Recirculation/Air quality system  
Temperature control, left-hand side  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
         
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Climate control  
For a description of the menu system, see  
page 94.  
Heated seats*  
Front seats  
Air distribution  
The figure consists of three  
buttons. When the buttons  
are pressed a lamp in front  
of the respective part of the  
figure illuminates and  
•Press the button once  
for the highest heat level  
– three lamps illuminate.  
Temperature control  
The temperatures on the  
driver and passenger sides  
can be set independently.  
When the car is started, the  
most recent setting is re-  
sumed.  
•Press the button twice  
for a lower heat level –  
two lamps illuminate.  
shows which air distribution  
is selected, see page 105.  
•Press the button three  
times for the lowest heat  
Auto  
The function automatically  
regulates temperature, air  
conditioning, fan speed, re-  
circulation, and air distribu-  
tion. If you select one or  
level – one lamp illuminates.  
04  
• Press the button four times to switch off  
the heat – no lamps illuminate.  
NOTE  
Rear seats  
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by  
selecting a higher/lower temperature than  
the actual temperature required.  
more manual functions, the  
other functions continue to  
be controlled automatically. The air quality  
sensor is engaged and all manual settings  
are switched off when AUTO is pressed. The  
display shows AUTO CLIMATE.  
A/C – ON/OFF  
The air conditioning is con-  
trolled automatically by the  
system when the ON lamp  
is on. This way, incoming  
air is sufficiently cooled and  
dehumidified. When the  
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set un-  
der Climate settings  
Automatic blower  
adjust. Choose between Low, Normal or  
High.  
OFF lamp is on, the air con-  
ditioning is always disengaged. Other func-  
tions are still controlled automatically. When  
defroster is selected, the air conditioning  
system is set for maximum dehumidification.  
NOTE  
Heat control takes place in the same way as  
for the front seat.  
Selecting the lowest fan speed slightly in-  
creases the risk of misting windows.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
         
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Climate control  
circulated, i.e. no outside air is taken into the  
Defroster  
Activating the air quality sensor.  
Switch between the three  
car when this function is activated. If the air  
in the car recirculates for too long, there is a  
risk of misting on the insides of the windows.  
Used to quickly remove  
misting and ice from the  
windscreen and side win-  
dows. Air flows to the win-  
dows at high fan speed.  
The light in the defroster  
button illuminates when the  
functions by pressing the  
button repeatedly.  
Timer  
With the timer function activated the system  
will exit manually activated recirculation  
mode according to a time that depends on  
the outside temperature. This reduces the  
risk of ice, misting and bad air. Activate/de-  
activate the function under Climate control  
The left-hand orange lamp illuminates –  
the air quality sensor is disengaged.  
function is active.  
The following also takes place in order to  
provide maximum dehumidification in the  
passenger compartment:  
• The centre green lamp illuminates – recir-  
culation not engaged, providing it is not  
required for cooling in hot weather.  
04  
settings  
Recirculation timer. For a de-  
scription of the menu system, see page 94.  
• The right-hand orange lamp illuminates –  
recirculation is engaged.  
• the air conditioning (A/C) is engaged auto-  
matically  
NOTE  
• recirculation is automatically disengaged.  
NOTE  
When Defroster is selected, recirculation is  
always deactivated.  
When the defroster function is switched off  
the climate control system returns to the pre-  
vious settings.  
The air quality sensor should always be en-  
gaged in order to obtain the best air in the  
passenger compartment.  
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to  
avoid misting.  
If the insides of the windows start misting  
up, disengage the air quality sensor, and  
the defroster function for the front, side and  
rear windows should also be used to demist  
the windows.  
Air quality system*  
The air quality system sepa-  
rates gases and particles to  
reduce the levels of odours  
and pollution in the passen-  
ger compartment. If the  
Recirculation/Air quality system  
Recirculation  
When recirculation is en-  
gaged the right-hand or-  
ange light in the button illu-  
minates. The function is se-  
lected to shut out bad air,  
exhaust gases etc. from the  
passenger compartment.  
The air in the passenger compartment is re-  
outside air is contaminated  
then the air intake is closed  
and the air is recirculated. When the AUTO  
button is depressed the air quality sensor is  
always engaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
         
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Climate control  
Air distribution table  
Air distribution  
Use  
Air distribution  
Use  
Air to windows. Some air  
flows from the air vents.  
The air is not recirculated.  
Air conditioning is always  
engaged.  
To remove ice and misting  
quickly.  
Air to the floor and  
windows. Some air flows  
from the dashboard air  
vents.  
To ensure comfortable  
conditions and good  
demisting in cold or  
humid weather.  
Air to windscreen and  
side windows. Some air  
flows from the air vents.  
To prevent misting and  
icing in a cold and humid  
climate, (not at too low  
fan speed to enable this).  
Air to floor and from  
dashboard air vents.  
In sunny weather with  
cool outside tempera-  
tures.  
04  
Airflow to windows and  
To ensure good comfort in  
Air to floor. Some air flows To warm or cool the feet.  
to the dashboard air vents  
and windows.  
from dashboard air vents. warm, dry weather.  
Airflow to the head and  
To ensure efficient cooling  
Airflow to windows, from  
dashboard air vents and  
to the floor.  
To cool the feet or provide  
warmer air to the upper  
body in cold weather or  
hot, dry weather.  
chest from the dashboard in warm weather.  
air vents.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Climate control  
Fuel-driven parking heater*  
IMPORTANT  
WARNING! ACHTUNG!  
AVERTISSEMENT!  
Repeated use of the parking heater com-  
bined with short journeys may discharge  
the battery and impair starting. If the park-  
ing heater is used regularly, the car must be  
driven for the same time as the parking  
heater is run to ensure that the alternator  
has time to correspondingly charge the bat-  
tery.  
General information about the parking  
heater  
The parking heater can be started immedi-  
ately or set using the timer. Here, start time  
refers to the time the car is heated and ready.  
The car’s electronic system calculates when  
heating should be started based on the out-  
side temperature. The heater is not run if the  
outdoor temperature exceeds 15 C. At tem-  
peratures from –10 C and below, the maxi-  
mum running time of the parking heater is  
50 minutes. When the parking heater is run-  
ning, Park heat ON is shown on the informa-  
tion display.  
04  
WARNING  
Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch  
of the parking heater before starting to refu-  
el. Check the information display to see that  
the parking heater is switched off.  
WARNING  
Parking on a hill  
The car must be outdoors when the parking  
heater is used.  
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of  
the car should point downhill to ensure that  
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.  
NOTE  
When the parking heater is active there may  
be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous-  
ing which is perfectly normal.  
Battery and fuel  
If the battery has insufficient charge or the  
fuel level is too low, the parking heater will be  
switched off automatically. A message ap-  
pears on the information display. Confirm the  
message by pressing the READ button, see  
page 107.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Climate control  
4. Touch RESET to move to the flashing  
Clock/timer  
If the car clock is reset the timer settings are  
deleted.  
Operation  
minutes setting.  
5. Scroll with the thumbwheel  
minutes required.  
to the  
Direct start/shutdown  
1. Use the thumbwheel  
start Park heat.  
6. Touch RESET to confirm the setting.  
to scroll to Direct  
7. Press RESET to activate the timer. After  
setting PM a second start time can be  
programmed for AM. Access this with  
1
2
3
2. Press RESET to switch between ON and  
OFF.  
the thumbwheel  
. Set the alternative  
start time in the same way as for AM.  
With direct start the parking heater will be ac-  
tivated for 50 minutes. Heating of the pas-  
senger compartment will begin as soon as  
the engine coolant has reached a tempera-  
ture of 38 ºC.  
04  
READ button  
Thumbwheel  
RESET button  
NOTE  
The car can be started and driven while the  
parking heater is still running.  
For more information on the information dis-  
play and READ, see page 97.  
Message in the information display  
Setting the timer  
When the timer settings or direct start are ac-  
tivated, the information symbol illuminates on  
the combined instrument panel and an ex-  
planatory text appears in the information dis-  
play. The display also indicates which timer  
is active when the driver removes the remote  
control key from the keyhole to leave the car.  
It is only possible to set times for the follow-  
ing 24 hours.  
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel  
heat timer.  
to Park  
2. Touch RESET to move to the flashing  
hours setting.  
3. Scroll with the thumbwheel  
hours required.  
to the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Climate control  
Auto mode or shutdown  
Additional heater (diesel)*  
The additional heater can be switched off for  
short distances to avoid discharging the bat-  
tery.  
1. Use the thumbwheel  
tional heat auto.  
to scroll to Addi-  
1
2
3
2. Press RESET to switch between ON and  
OFF.  
04  
READ button  
Thumbwheel  
RESET button  
The additional heater may be required for  
achieving the correct temperature in the pas-  
senger compartment during cold weather.  
The additional heater starts automatically  
when extra heat is required and the engine is  
running. It is switched off automatically when  
the correct temperature is reached or when  
the engine is switched off.  
NOTE  
When the additional heater is active there  
may be smoke from the right-hand wheel  
housing which is perfectly normal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
 
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Audio system  
General  
Overview  
Steering wheel keypad  
The audio system can be equipped with dif-  
ferent options and different versions. There  
are three system versions: Performance,  
High Performance and Premium Sound. The  
system version is shown in the display when  
the audio system is started.  
2
3
1
2
1
4
3
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the  
symbol  
are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
The Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is  
manufactured under license from  
04  
4
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
Input for external audio source (AUX)  
Steering wheel keypad  
Confirm selection in menu system, ac-  
cept call.  
Remote control key and ignition  
positions  
The audio system can be used without the  
remote control key in the ignition switch for  
15 minutes at a time.  
Lead up in menu system. Interrupt cur-  
rent function. End/refuse calls, clear en-  
tered characters.  
Centre console control panel  
Control panel with headphones socket*  
Volume  
A short press scrolls between CD tracks  
or preset radio stations. A long press  
fast-winds CD tracks or searches radio  
stations automatically.  
NOTE  
Remove the remote control key from the ig-  
nition switch if the audio system is used  
when the engine is switched off. This is to  
avoid discharging the battery unnecessari-  
ly.  
If the audio system is active when the engine  
is switched off then it is activated automati-  
cally the next time the engine is started.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
                 
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Audio system  
Scroll/search forward and backward  
Short presses on are used to scroll be-  
tween CD tracks or preset radio stations.  
Long presses are used to fast-wind CD  
tracks or to search for radio stations auto-  
matically.  
Rear control panel with headphones  
socket*  
Headphones with an impedance of  
16–32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or high-  
er are recommended for best sound repro-  
duction.  
Menus and MY KEY  
Some functions are controlled from the menu  
system in the centre console. For more infor-  
mation on menus, see page 94. For informa-  
tion on the audio system’s functions together  
with Bluetooth handsfree or phone, see  
page 142.  
Limitations  
1
2
1
• The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.)  
played back in the speakers cannot be  
controlled from the rear control panel.  
Save favourite functions with MY KEY.  
04  
• RDS messages may not appear if the  
radio is playing back in the headphones  
while another audio source is playing back  
in the speakers.  
3
4
3
Volume  
Scroll/search forward and backward  
Audio source, activating  
1. Select the function in the menu to be  
stored. Only one selection of functions  
can be stored.  
Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)  
2. Hold MY KEY depressed for more than  
Activating/deactivating  
two seconds.  
The control panel is activated with MODE  
when the audio system is active. Deactiva-  
tion is automatic when the audio system is  
deactivated or with a long press on MODE.  
3. Activate the stored function with a short  
press on MY KEY.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Audio system  
The following functions can be stored  
with MY KEY:  
CD/CD changer  
Random (CD changer)  
News  
TP  
Disc text  
04  
FM  
News  
TP  
Radio text  
Search PTY  
Show PTY text  
SIRIUS  
Add music track to music track memory  
Direct to channel shortcut  
Music track search  
AUDIO SETTINGS  
Sound setting  
Auto. volume control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Audio system  
low, medium or high. Select the level under  
Audio settings Auto volume control.  
Treble – Treble level.  
Audio functions  
Fader – Balance between the front and  
rear speakers.  
External audio source audio volume  
The AUX input can be used for connecting an  
MP3 player for example, see page 109.  
Balance – Balance between the right and  
left-hand speakers.  
Surround* – Surround settings.  
1
Under Surround 3 channel stereo or  
Dolby pro logic II can be activated by select-  
ing 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This enables  
the following options:  
NOTE  
2
5
The audio quality may be impaired if the  
player is charged while the audio system is  
in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging  
the player.  
04  
1
Centre level – Level for centre speaker.  
4
3
1
Surround level – Level for surround.  
Centre console, controls for audio functions  
Sometimes the AUX external audio source  
can be heard at a different volume to the in-  
ternal audio sources. If the audio volume of  
the external audio source is too high then the  
sound quality can be impaired. Prevent this  
by adjusting the input volume of the AUX in-  
put:  
Equalizer  
Internal audio sources: AM, FM and CD  
Sound levels for different frequencies can be  
2
adjusted separately using the equalizer .  
External audio source. For connection,  
see page 109  
1. Go to Audio settings and select  
Equalizer Front or Equalizer Rear.  
Pushbutton and knob controls for adjust-  
ing the sound pattern  
The sound level for the wavelength is adjust-  
Navigation button for AUX volume and  
equalizer  
ed with  
Press  
/
on the navigation button.  
to select another wavelength.  
1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using  
MODE and go to Volume, AUX input.  
/
Volume and on/off  
2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.  
2. Turn the control  
navigation button.  
or press  
/
the  
1
Sound stage  
Audio volume and automatic volume  
control  
The audio system compensates for disrupt-  
ing noises in the passenger compartment by  
increasing the volume with the speed of the  
car. The level of compensation can be set at  
The sound experience can be optimised for  
the driver’s seat, both front seats or the rear  
seat. Select one of the options under Audio  
Sound pattern  
Press the control  
among the following options. The adjustment  
is made by turning the control  
repeatedly to browse  
settings  
Premium Sound  
Soundstage.  
1
.
2
Certain audio systems  
Bass – Bass level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
             
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Audio system  
Start playback (CD changer)  
Pause  
CD functions  
If a CD position with a music CD is already  
selected when CD is pressed then playback  
starts automatically. Otherwise select a disc  
If the volume is turned down completely, the  
CD player is stopped. The player is restarted  
when volume is increased.  
with the number buttons 1-6 or  
the navigation button.  
/
on  
1
2
6
1
Audio files  
The CD player also supports audio files in  
MP3 and WMA formats.  
Insert a CD (CD changer)  
1. Select an empty position with the number  
3
4
buttons 1-6 or  
button.  
/
on the navigation  
NOTE  
04  
Some copy protected audio files may not  
be read by the player.  
5
An empty position is marked on the display.  
The text Insert disc shows that a new disc  
can be inserted. The CD changer can hold up  
to six CDs.  
Centre console, controls for CD functions  
When a CD containing audio files is inserted  
into the player the disc’s directory structure  
is read in. It may take a while before playback  
starts depending on the quality of the disc.  
CD eject  
2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.  
CD insert and eject slot  
Navigation button for changing CD  
tracks  
Disc eject  
Navigation and playback  
A CD will stay in the ejected position for ap-  
prox. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-in-  
serted in the player and playback continues.  
Fast-wind and change CD track  
CD changer position selection*  
Scan CD  
If a disc containing audio files is inside the  
CD player then ENTER leads to the disc’s di-  
rectory structure. The directory structure is  
navigated in the same way as the audio sys-  
tem’s menu structure. Audio files have the  
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject  
button.  
Start playback (CD player)  
symbol  
symbol  
ENTER.  
and directories have the  
If a music CD is in the player when CD is  
pressed then playback is started automati-  
cally. Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.  
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject  
button. The entire magazine is emptied disc  
by disc.  
. Start audio file playback with  
When the playback of a file is finished the  
playback of the other files in the same direc-  
1
High Performance and Premium Sound  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
 
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Audio system  
tory continues. Directory change takes place  
automatically when all files in the current di-  
rectory have been played back.  
Different messages appear depending on  
which random function has been selected:  
activate in CD mode under CD settings  
Disc text.  
RANDOM means that the tracks from only  
one music CD are played  
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio  
files  
RND ALL means that all tracks on all  
music CDs in the CD changer are played.  
Short presses  
/
on the navigation but-  
RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio  
files in a directory on the current CD are  
played.  
ton are used to scroll between CD tracks/au-  
dio files. Long presses are used to fast-wind  
CD tracks/audio files. The steering wheel  
keypad can also be used for this purpose.  
Track change can also be made by turning  
Tuning.  
CD player  
If a normal music CD is being played, acti-  
vate/deactivate under Random.  
04  
If a disc with audio files is being played, acti-  
Scan CD  
vate/deactivate under Random  
Folder.  
This function plays the first ten seconds of  
each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to ac-  
tivate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to con-  
tinue playback of the current CD track/au-  
dio file.  
CD changer  
If a normal music CD is being played under  
Random Single disc or Random All  
discs, the option All discs only applies to the  
music CDs in the changer.  
If a CD with audio files is being played, acti-  
vate/deactivate instead under Random  
Folder. If you select another CD the function  
is deactivated.  
Random  
This function plays the tracks in random or-  
der. The random CD tracks/audio files can be  
scrolled through in the normal way.  
Disc text  
NOTE  
If track titles are stored on a music CD then  
they can be shown on the display. This also  
applies to MP3 and WMA files for Premium  
Sound and High Performance. Activate/de-  
It is only possible to scroll between random  
CD tracks on the current disc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
       
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Audio system  
tinues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the  
Tuning, manual  
1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.  
Radio functions  
display. The automatically stored presets can  
now be selected using the preset buttons.  
Automatic preset storage can be cancelled  
using EXIT.  
2. Turn TUNING.  
Preset  
Ten station presets can be stored per wave-  
length. FM has two memories for presets:  
FM1 and FM2. Only radio stations played  
through the car’s speakers can be stored as  
presets. The stored presets are selected us-  
ing the preset buttons.  
Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for ex-  
ample AUTO or FM.  
7
1
2
3
Returning to Auto mode provides access to  
the autostored presets:  
6
5
1. Press AUTO.  
04  
Auto appears on the display.  
4
Preset storage can be carried out manually  
or automatically.  
Centre console, controls for radio functions  
2. Press a preset button.  
Preset storage, manual  
1. Tune into a station.  
Navigation button for tuning, automatic  
Cancel function in progress  
Tuning, manual  
Scan wavelength  
The function automatically searches the cur-  
rent wavelength for strong stations. When a  
station is found, it is played for approx.  
eight seconds before scanning is resumed.  
While the station is playing it can be stored  
as a preset as usual.  
2. Hold in one of the preset buttons until  
the message Channel stored appears on  
the display.  
Scan wavelength  
Preset storage, automatic  
Preset storage, automatic  
The function is especially useful in areas  
where the radio stations and their frequen-  
cies are unfamiliar. The ten strongest radio  
stations are stored automatically in a sepa-  
rate memory.  
Preset buttons and preset storage, man-  
ual  
1. Select wavelength using AM or FM.  
Select wavelength AM and FM (FM1 and  
FM2)  
2. Press SCAN.  
SCAN appears on the display. Close using  
SCAN or EXIT.  
Tuning, automatic  
1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.  
1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.  
2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring... ap-  
pears on the display.  
2. Press  
/
on the navigation button.  
RDS functions  
Radio Data System – RDS links FM transmit-  
ters into a network. An FM transmitter in such  
Once Autostoring... disappears from the dis-  
play, the stations are stored. The radio con-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
     
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Audio system  
a network sends information that gives an  
RDS radio the following functions:  
Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio  
source.  
through. The symbol NEWS shows that the  
function is active.  
• Automatically switches to a stronger  
transmitter if reception in the area is poor.  
Activate/deactivate under FM settings  
News.  
Alarm  
This function is used to warn of serious acci-  
dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot  
be temporarily interrupted or deactivated.  
The message ALARM! appears on the dis-  
play when an alarm message is transmitted.  
• Searches for programme type, such as  
traffic information or news.  
News from current/all stations  
The radio can interrupt with news from only  
the set (current) station or from all stations.  
Go to FM settings Advanced radio set-  
tings News station to change.  
• Receives text information on current radio  
programme.  
NOTE  
Traffic information – TP  
04  
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only  
some if its functionality.  
This function allows traffic information broad-  
cast within a set station’s RDS network to  
break through. The symbol TP shows that  
the function has been activated. If the set  
Programme types – PTY  
The PTY function can be used to select dif-  
ferent programme types, such as pop music  
and serious classic. The PTY symbol indi-  
cates that the function is active. This function  
allows programme types broadcast within a  
set station’s RDS network to break through.  
If a required programme type is located the  
radio can switch stations interrupting the au-  
dio source currently in use. For example, if  
the CD player is in use, it is paused. The in-  
terrupting transmission is played at a preset  
volume, see page 117. The radio returns to  
the previous audio source and volume when  
the set programme type is no longer broad-  
cast.  
station can send traffic information then  
appears on the display.  
TP  
Activate/deactivate under FM settings TP.  
Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro-  
gramme type under FM settings PTY  
Select PTY.  
TP from current station/all stations  
The radio can interrupt with traffic informa-  
tion from only the set (current) station or from  
all stations.  
Deactivate by clearing the PTYs under FM  
settings Clear all PTYs.  
The programme functions alarm (ALARM),  
traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and  
programme types (PTY) interrupt one anoth-  
er in order of priority, where alarm has the  
highest priority and programme types has  
the lowest. For further programme interrup-  
tion settings, see EON and REG, page 117.  
Go to FM settings Advanced radio set-  
tings TP TP Station to change.  
PTY search  
This function searches the entire wavelength  
for the selected programme type.  
News  
This function allows news broadcasts within  
a set station’s RDS network to break  
1. Select a PTY under FM settings PTY  
Select PTY.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
       
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Audio system  
1
2. Go to FM settings PTY Search PTY.  
occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek Press  
Exit to cancel appears on the display.  
Distant – interrupts if the station trans-  
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of  
static.  
If the radio finds any of the selected pro-  
gramme types then the display shows  
>| To seek . To continue searching for anoth-  
er broadcast of the selected programme  
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM  
Off – no interruption for programmes from  
other transmitters.  
settings  
Advanced radio settings  
AF.  
types, press  
on the navigation button.  
Regional radio programmes – REG  
Resetting RDS functions  
This function causes the radio to continue  
with a regional transmitter even if its signal  
strength is low. The symbol REG shows that  
the function is active.  
All radio settings can be reset to the original  
factory settings. The reset is carried out in  
FM mode under FM settings  
Display of programme type  
The programme type of the current station  
can be shown on the display.  
Advanced radio settings  
Reset all.  
04  
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM  
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM  
settings  
PTY  
Show PTY  
settings  
Advanced radio settings  
Re-  
Volume control, programme types  
The interrupting programme types, e.g.  
NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume select-  
ed for each respective programme type. If  
the volume level is adjusted during the pro-  
gramme interruption, the new level is saved  
until the next programme interruption.  
gional.  
NOTE  
Enhanced Other Networks – EON  
This function is useful in urban areas with  
many regional radio stations. It allows the  
distance between the car and the radio sta-  
tion transmitter to determine when pro-  
gramme functions should interrupt the cur-  
rent audio source.  
Not all radio stations support display of pro-  
gramme type.  
Radio text  
Some RDS stations transmit information on  
programme content, artists, etc. This infor-  
mation can be shown on the display.  
Activate/deactivate in FM mode by selecting  
one of the options under FM settings  
vanced radio settings EON:  
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Radio  
text.  
Ad-  
Local – interrupts only if the radio station  
transmitter is close.  
Automatic frequency update – AF  
This function selects one of the strongest  
transmitters for a set station. The function  
may need to search through the entire FM  
wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If this  
1
Default/Factory setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
               
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Trip computer  
Average  
General  
Functions  
NOTE  
The average fuel consumption since the last  
reset. Reset using RESET.  
If a warning message appears while you are  
using the trip computer, this message must  
be acknowledged in order to revert to the  
trip computer function. Acknowledge by  
pressing READ.  
NOTE  
There may be a slight error in the reading if  
a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used.  
1
2
3
Km to empty tank  
To change unit specified for distance and  
speed, contact an authorised Volvo work-  
shop.  
The calculation is based on the average fuel  
consumption over the last 30 km and the re-  
maining fuel volume. This shows the approxi-  
mate distance that can be driven with the fuel  
quantity remaining in the tank. When km to  
empty is less than 20 km then "----" is shown  
on the display.  
04  
Information display and controls  
Current speed*  
Current speed is shown in miles per hour,  
mph.  
READ – confirms  
Thumbwheel – browse between menus  
and options in the trip computer list  
Average speed  
The car calculates the average speed from  
the last resetting. Reset using RESET.  
RESET – resets  
NOTE  
To scroll through trip computer information,  
turn the thumbwheel up or down in steps.  
Continue turning to return to the starting  
point.  
There may be a slight error in the reading if  
a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used.  
Current consumption  
Resetting  
1. Select Average speed or Average.  
Current fuel consumption is calculated every  
second. The information on the display is up-  
dated every couple of seconds. When the car  
is stationary, "----" appears on the display.  
2. Press and hold RESET for approx.  
1 second to reset the selected function.  
If RESET is kept depressed for at  
3 three seconds then Average speed  
and Average are reset simultaneously.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
       
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Compass*  
Calibration  
Selecting the zone  
Operation  
6
8
9
10  
8
7
9
7
11  
12  
6
5
4
3
2
1
13  
14  
15  
04  
Calibrating the compass.  
Magnetic zones.  
Rearview mirror with compass.  
The compass may need calibrating to work  
correctly. CAL is shown in the mirror’s dis-  
play if the compass needs calibrating.  
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.  
The correct zone must be selected for the  
compass to work correctly.  
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview  
mirror has an integrated display that shows  
the compass direction in which the front of  
the car is pointing. Eight different directions  
are shown with English abbreviations: N  
(north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south  
east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west)  
and NW (north west).  
1. Stop the car in a large open area.  
2. Start the car.  
1. Ignition position II.  
2. Press and hold the button on the rear of  
the rearview mirror (use a paper clip or  
similar) for at least 3 seconds. The  
3. Press and hold the button on the rear of  
the rearview mirror (use a paper clip or  
similar) until CAL is shown again (ap-  
prox. 6 seconds).  
number for the current area is shown.  
3. Press the button repeatedly until the  
number for the required geographic  
area (1–15) is shown.  
The compass is activated automatically  
when the car is started or in ignition  
position II. To deactivate/activate the com-  
pass, use a paper clip for example and press  
in the button on the rear side of the mirror.  
4. Drive off as usual. CAL disappears from  
the display when calibration is com-  
plete.  
Alternative calibration method:  
Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no  
more than eight km/h until CAL disap-  
pears from the display when calibration  
is complete.  
4. The display will revert to showing the  
compass direction after a few seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
         
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Stability and traction control system  
gine is restarted, drive to an authorised Volvo  
workshop.  
General  
Operation  
The stability and traction control system,  
DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction Con-  
trol) helps the driver to avoid skidding and  
improves the car’s traction.  
Symbols in the combined instrument  
panel  
If the symbols  
and  
are displayed at  
1
2
The system limits the driving and brake force  
of the wheels individually so that skidding  
can be avoided. This increases manoeuvra-  
bility and as a result safety in the event of  
sudden movement.  
the same time, read the message on the in-  
formation display.  
If the symbol  
appears alone then it may  
appear as follows:  
04  
• Flashing light means that the system is  
now being activated.  
Traction is improved by means of the system  
distributing the driving force between the  
wheels. The system primarily engages at low  
speed on poor road surfaces.  
• Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys-  
tem check when the engine is started.  
1. Turn the thumbwheel  
menu is shown.  
until the DSTC  
• Constant glow after starting the engine or  
while driving means system fault.  
DSTC ON means that the system function is  
unchanged.  
The activation of the system during braking  
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The  
car may accelerate slower than expected  
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.  
DSTC spin control OFF means that system  
operation is reduced.  
Reduced operation  
System operation during skidding and accel-  
eration can be reduced. Operation during  
skidding is delayed and so allows more skid-  
ding which provides greater freedom for dy-  
namic driving. Traction in deep snow or sand  
is improved as traction is no longer limited.  
2. Press and hold RESET until the DSTC  
menu is changed.  
Messages in the information display  
DSTC Temporarily OFF System temporari-  
ly reduced due to excessive brake disc tem-  
perature. The function is reactivated auto-  
matically when the brakes have cooled.  
The system remains reduced until the engine  
is next started.  
WARNING  
DSTC Service required – System disabled  
due to a fault.  
The car’s driving characteristics may deteri-  
orate if the function is reduced.  
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the  
engine. If the message remains when the en-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
         
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Adapting driving characteristics  
Operation  
Active chassis (Four C)*  
Speed related steering force*  
Steering force increases with the speed of  
the car to give the driver enhanced sensitivi-  
ty. At low speed the car is easy to steer in or-  
der to facilitate parking for example.  
Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con-  
trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the char-  
acteristics of the shock absorbers so that the  
car’s driving characteristics can be adjusted.  
There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and  
Advanced.  
Steering force can be changed under Car  
settings  
Steering force level For a de-  
scription of the menu system, see page 94.  
This menu cannot be accessed while the car  
is in motion.  
Comfort  
This setting means that the car is perceived  
as being more comfortable and is recom-  
mended for longer journeys. Shock absorp-  
tion is soft and the movement of the body is  
smooth and gentle.  
04  
Chassis settings  
Use the buttons in the centre console to  
change setting. The setting in use when the  
engine is switched off is activated next time  
the engine is started.  
Sport  
This setting means that the car is perceived  
as being more sporty and is recommended  
for more active driving. Steering response is  
faster than in the Comfort mode. Shock ab-  
sorption is harder and the body follows the  
road in order to reduce rolling during fast  
cornering.  
Advanced  
This setting is only recommended on very  
even and smooth road surfaces.  
The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi-  
mum roadholding and rolling in bends is fur-  
ther minimised.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
         
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Cruise control*  
speed is stored and is used as the set speed.  
The set speed is shown in the display.  
depressed for a longer time (approx.  
60 seconds). Cruise control then changes  
over to standby mode and the set speed is  
saved.  
Operation  
NOTE  
1
2
3
Cruise control cannot be engaged at  
speeds below 30 km/h.  
Temporary deactivation  
5
Press 0 to disengage cruise control tempo-  
rarily. The saved speed is shown in brackets  
in the information display.  
Adjusting the set speed  
In active mode the speed is adjusted with  
___  
4
0
1
long or short presses on  
or  
.
Resume set speed  
04  
If cruise control has been deactivated tem-  
A temporary increase in speed, such as while  
overtaking, does not affect the cruise control  
setting. When the accelerator is released the  
car will return to the set speed.  
porarily, it can be reactivated by pressing  
The speed is then set to the previously set  
speed.  
.
Display and controls  
Standby mode  
Resume set speed  
Deactivating  
NOTE  
NOTE  
A significant increase in speed may arise af-  
ter the speed has been resumed with  
If one of the cruise control buttons is kept  
depressed for more than approx. one  
minute then cruise control is disengaged.  
The engine must then be switched off in or-  
der to then reset cruise control.  
Activate/set speed  
Speed, set  
.
Deactivation  
Activating and setting the speed  
Cruise control is disengaged with CRUISE or  
by switching off the engine. The set speed is  
cleared.  
In order to enable the activation of cruise  
control, it must first be engaged in standby  
Automatic temporary deactivation  
mode with CRUISE. The symbol  
ilumi-  
Cruise control is deactivated spontaneously  
when the driving wheels spin or if the car’s  
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h. Cruise  
control is also deactivated when the brakes  
are used, when the gear selector is moved to  
neutral position or if the accelerator pedal is  
nates and the text  
(---) km/h shows that cruise control is in  
standby mode. Cruise control is then activat-  
ed with  
or , after which the current  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
     
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Adaptive cruise control*  
General  
Function  
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is designed to  
assist the driver with support on long straight  
roads in steady traffic, for example on motor-  
ways and main roads.  
1
WARNING  
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision  
avoidance system. The driver must inter-  
vene if the system does not detect a vehicle  
in front.  
Adaptive cruise control does not brake for  
slow or stationary vehicles.  
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for  
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at  
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of  
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/  
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or  
on slip roads.  
Maintenance of cruise control components  
must only be performed by an authorised  
Volvo workshop.  
2
3
WARNING  
04  
Adaptive cruise control cannot cover all  
driving situations and traffic, weather and  
road conditions.  
Functions overview  
The Function section on page 123 and after  
informs about limitations that the driver  
must be aware of before using the adaptive  
cruise control.  
When driving you are responsible for main-  
taining the correct distance and speed,  
even when adaptive cruise control is used.  
You must always pay attention to the traffic  
conditions and intervene when adaptive  
cruise control is not maintaining a suitable  
speed or suitable distance.  
Warning lamp, braking by driver required  
The distance to the vehicle ahead is meas-  
ured by a radar sensor. The speed is regulat-  
ed by acceleration and braking. It is normal  
for the brakes to emit a low sound when they  
are being used by cruise control.  
Controls  
Radar sensor  
Adaptive cruise control consists of the cruise  
control system and coordinated spacing sys-  
tem.  
WARNING  
The brake pedal moves when the cruise  
control brakes. Do not rest your foot under  
the brake pedal as it could become  
trapped.  
The cruise control objective is to follow the  
vehicle ahead but in the same lane and at a  
set distance. If the radar sensor has not de-  
tected a vehicle ahead then the only objec-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
       
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Adaptive cruise control*  
tive is the set speed. This is also the case if  
the speed of the vehicle ahead exceeds the  
cruise control set speed.  
minates the windscreen. The red warning  
lamp may be difficult to notice in strong sun-  
light or when sunglasses are being worn.  
The radar sensor and its limitations  
The radar sensor is used both by the adap-  
tive cruise control and the collision warning  
system. It is designed to detect cars or larger  
vehicles driving in the same direction. The ra-  
dar sensor does not detect pedestrians, or  
oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and  
objects. Warnings are not given and braking  
is not applied in such cases.  
The adaptive cruise control objective is to  
control the speed in a smooth way. In situa-  
tions that demand sudden braking you must  
brake yourself. This applies with large differ-  
ences in speed, or if the vehicle in front  
brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar  
sensor, braking may come unexpectedly or  
not at all, see page 124.  
WARNING  
Cruise control only warns of vehicles de-  
tected by the radar sensor. Consequently  
there may be no warning or it may be sub-  
ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but  
brake when it is necessary.  
Modification of the radar sensor could result  
in it being illegal to use.  
04  
Automatic deactivation  
Adaptive cruise control can only be activated  
above 30 km/h. If speed falls below 30 km/h  
or if engine speed becomes too slow then  
the adaptive cruise control disengages and  
stops braking. In which case the driver must  
immediately take over and maintain the dis-  
tance to vehicles in front. The highest speed  
setting is 200 km/h. In some situations when  
the system cannot be activated Cruise Una-  
vailable is shown in the display, see  
Adaptive cruise control is dependent on oth-  
er systems e.g. stability and traction control  
system (DSTC). If any of these systems stop  
working then cruise control is automatically  
deactivated.  
WARNING  
Accessories or other objects must not be  
installed in front of the grille.  
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect  
vehicles in front is reduced significantly:  
In the event of automatic deactivation a sig-  
nal will sound and the message Cruise Can-  
celled is shown in the display. You must then  
intervene and adapt your driving and speed  
to vehicles in front.  
• if the radar sensor becomes blocked and  
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy  
rain or slush, or if other objects have  
collected in front of the radar sensor.  
page 126.  
An automatic deactivation can be due to:  
Warning lamp, braking by driver  
required  
NOTE  
• speed falls below 30 km/h  
• wheels lose traction  
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capaci-  
ty that is equivalent to approximately 30 % of  
the car’s braking capacity. If the car needs to  
brake more heavily than cruise control ca-  
pacity and the driver does not brake then a  
signal sounds and the red warning lamp illu-  
Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor  
clean.  
• brake temperature is high  
• engine speed is too low  
• if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-  
cantly different from your own speed.  
• the radar sensor is blocked e.g. by wet  
snow or rain  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Adaptive cruise control*  
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.  
In some situations it may detect a vehicle  
other than the one expected or not detect  
any vehicle at all.  
then re-engaged when the accelerator pedal  
is released.  
Operation  
1
Activating and setting the speed  
To enable cruise control activation it must  
2
3
1
first be engaged in standby mode with  
The set time interval is briefly shown in the  
display. Cruise control is activated with  
, after which the current speed is stored  
.
or  
2
and used as the set speed. The set speed is  
shown in the display. In active mode the  
speed is adjusted with long or short presses  
4
04  
0
1/2  
1
3
on  
,
or . The button  
has the same  
Display and controls  
function as +, but results in a lower increase  
in speed.  
Activate and resume settings, increase  
speed  
NOTE  
Standby mode, on/off  
Set distance  
If cruise control does not seem to react to  
activation the reason may be that the time  
interval to the closest vehicle prevents an  
increase in speed.  
Radar sensor field of vision (grey)  
Activating and setting the speed  
Sometimes the radar sensor cannot de-  
tect vehicles at close quarters, for exam-  
ple a vehicle that drives in between your  
car and vehicles in front.  
Driver operation  
Cruise control is deactivated when the  
brakes are used, the gear selector is moved  
to neutral position, or if the accelerator pedal  
is depressed for a longer period. Cruise con-  
trol then changes over to standby mode and  
the driver has full control of the car. If the ac-  
celerator pedal is kept depressed for a short-  
er period, for example during overtaking,  
cruise control is temporarily disengaged and  
NOTE  
In some situations cruise control cannot be  
activated. In which case Cruise Unavaila-  
ble is shown in the display, see page 126.  
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or  
vehicles not driving in the centre of the  
lane can remain undetected.  
In bends the radar sensor may detect the  
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle  
from view.  
Set time interval  
The set time interval to vehicles in front is in-  
creased with  
and decreased with  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Adaptive cruise control*  
The current time interval is shown briefly in  
the display following adjustment. Five differ-  
ent time intervals can be chosen from. A  
longer time interval means smoother speed  
control. The recommended time interval is  
three to five. Time intervals one and two are  
primarily intended for driving in queues in  
heavy traffic, in which case you must inter-  
vene more often.  
Symbols on the display  
Symbol Specification  
Message  
Specification  
Cruise  
Unavailable  
Cruise control cannot be  
activated. This could be  
due to:  
Standby mode or active  
mode without detected  
vehicle.  
• traction control and  
stability function  
(DSTC) has been re-  
duced, see page 120  
Active mode with detected  
vehicle to which cruise  
control adapts the speed.  
Distance information.  
• brake temperature is  
high  
NOTE  
04  
• the radar sensor is  
blocked e.g. by wet  
snow or rain  
Only use the time interval that is allowed in  
accordance with local traffic regulations.  
Messages on the display  
Message  
Specification  
Radar  
blocked  
See manual  
Cruise control temporarily  
disengaged. The message  
is shown if the radar  
Deactivating and resuming settings  
Cruise control is deactivated, either with a  
short press on  
, or by means of driver in-  
sensor is blocked and  
cannot detect other  
tervention, e.g. braking. The set speed is  
then shown in brackets. Speed and time in-  
terval are resumed with one press on  
vehicles e.g. in heavy rain  
or if slush has collected in  
front of the radar sensor.  
.
Cruise  
The cruise control has  
been shut down. The  
driver must regulate the  
speed.  
NOTE  
Cancelled  
A significant increase in speed may arise af-  
ter the speed has been resumed with  
.
CruiseService Cruise control not  
required  
working. Contact an  
authorised Volvo  
workshop.  
A short press on  
in standby mode or a  
long press in active mode deactivates cruise  
control. The set speed is cleared and cannot  
be resumed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
 
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Collision warning system with brake support*  
the pedal is light. The collision warning sys-  
tem is active between 7 km/h and 180 km/h.  
General  
Function  
The collision warning system (Collision Warn-  
ing with Brake Support, CW) is an aid de-  
signed to warn the driver who is at risk from  
driving into a vehicle in front that is driving in  
the same direction.  
1
Limitations  
The visual warning signal may be difficult to  
notice in strong sunlight or when sunglasses  
are being worn. For this reason always acti-  
vate the warning sound during such condi-  
tions.  
The brake support reduces the collision  
speed.  
2
Maintenance of collision warning system  
components must only be performed by an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
NOTE  
04  
The visual warning signal can be temporari-  
ly disengaged in the event of high passen-  
ger compartment temperature caused by  
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs  
then the warning sound is activated even if  
it is deactivated in the menu system.  
Functions overview  
WARNING  
Visual warning signal, collision risk  
Sensor  
The collision warning system does not work  
in all driving situations and traffic, weather  
and road conditions. The collision warning  
system does not react to slow vehicles, sta-  
tionary vehicles or vehicles travelling in an-  
other direction to the host vehicle.  
Warnings are given at the earliest in the  
event of high collision risk. The Function  
section and after informs about limitations  
that the driver must be aware of before use.  
The collision warning system has brake  
support that only reduces collision speed if  
the driver brakes.  
Never wait for a collision warning. When  
driving you are responsible for maintaining  
the correct distance and speed, even when  
the collision warning system is used.  
The radar sensor detects vehicles in front  
that are driving in the same direction as you.  
In the event of there being a risk of collision  
with such a vehicle your attention is drawn  
with a red warning lamp and a warning  
sound.  
Warnings may not appear if the distance to  
the vehicle in front is very small or if steering  
wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a  
very active driving style.  
Warnings may be triggered late, be absent or  
triggered unnecessarily if the traffic situation  
means that the radar sensor cannot accu-  
rately detect a vehicle in front. The collision  
warning system uses the same radar sensors  
as adaptive cruise control. For more informa-  
tion on the radar sensor and its limitations,  
see page 124.  
If the risk of collision still increases after the  
warning then the brake support is activated.  
The brake support prepares the brake sys-  
tem for rapid braking and the brakes are ap-  
plied gently, which may be noticed as a slight  
jerk. If the brake pedal is depressed suffi-  
ciently quickly then braking is implemented  
with full brake function, even if the force on  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
       
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Collision warning system with brake support*  
An absent or late warning means that there is  
no brake support or it comes late.  
The warning sound and warning lamp are ac-  
tivated automatically when the car is started.  
The automatic activation can be deselected  
Operation  
Some settings are controlled from the centre  
console via a menu system. For information  
on how the menu system is used, see  
page 94.  
The incorrect warnings may be in the form of  
both audio and visual signals. One way of re-  
ducing the number of incorrect warnings is to  
reduce the warning distance.  
under Car settings  
Collision warn. set-  
tings On at start up.  
The warning sound can be activated/deacti-  
vated separately under Car settings Col-  
Warning sound.  
lision warn. settings  
WARNING  
04  
When adaptive cruise control is used the  
warning lamp and warning sound are used  
by the cruise control even if it has been de-  
activated by the driver  
Set warning distance  
The sensitivity states how early the visual and  
any audible warning is triggered. Select one  
of the options under Car settings  
Button for activating/deactivating the warning  
signals.  
Collision warn. settings  
tance.  
Warning dis-  
NOTE  
The brake support is not affected by the  
settings described here.  
NOTE  
In some situations warnings may seem to  
be late, even though the warning distance  
has been set to Long.  
Activating/deactivating warning signals  
The collision warning system’s audio and vis-  
ual signals can be activated/deactivated  
using  
. The light in the button indicates  
that the warning signals are activated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
 
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Collision warning system with brake support*  
Checking settings  
The current settings are most easily checked  
by pressing twice on  
in quick succes-  
sion. The settings are shown in the display.  
Messages on the display  
Radar blocked See manual – The collision  
warning system is temporarily disengaged.  
The message is shown e.g. in heavy rain or if  
slush has collected in front of the radar sen-  
sor. See the section on radar sensor limita-  
tions, page 124  
04  
Collision warn. Service required – The colli-  
sion warning system is disengaged. Contact  
an authorised Volvo workshop if the mes-  
sage remains.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Parking assistance*  
The frequency of the signal increases as you  
towbar or similar. Otherwise they would trig-  
ger the sensors.  
General  
come closer to an object in front of or behind  
the car. If the volume of another audio source  
from the audio system is high, then this is au-  
tomatically lowered.  
Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-  
ing. A signal indicates the distance to a de-  
tected object.  
Rear parking assistance is deactivated auto-  
matically when towing a trailer if Volvo genu-  
ine trailer wiring is used.  
The tone becomes constant at a distance of  
about 30 cm. If there are objects within this  
distance both behind and in front of the car,  
the signal alternates between front and rear  
speakers.  
WARNING  
Front parking assistance  
Parking assistance does not relinquish the  
driver’s own responsibility during parking.  
The sensors have blind spots where objects  
cannot be detected. Be aware of children  
and animals near the car.  
04  
Rear parking assistance  
1
Function  
The system is activated automatically when  
the car is started. The lamp in the switch in  
the switch panel illuminates. The text Park  
Assist ON is shown in the centre console  
display if reverse gear is engaged or if the  
front sensors detect an object.  
The distance covered to the front of the car is  
about 0.8 metres. The signal comes from the  
front loudspeakers.  
The front parking assistance is active at  
speeds of below 15 km/h, even during re-  
versing. The system is deactivated at a high-  
er speed. However, the lamp in the button re-  
mains on in order to indicate that the system  
is active for the next time the driver shall  
park. When the speed is below 10 km/h the  
system is reactivated.  
Front parking assistance cannot be com-  
bined with auxiliary lamps because the sen-  
sors are affected by the auxiliary lamps.  
The distance covered to the rear of the car is  
about 1.5 metres. Rear parking assistance is  
activated when reverse gear is engaged. The  
signal comes from the rear loudspeakers.  
Fault indicator  
If the information symbol illuminates with  
constant glow and Park Assist syst Service  
required is shown on the information display  
then parking assistance is disengaged.  
The system must be deactivated when re-  
versing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the  
1
Depending on the market, the Parking assist-  
ance system may be either standard, an op-  
tion or an accessory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
     
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Parking assistance*  
Cleaning the sensors  
Activating/deactivating  
IMPORTANT  
In certain conditions the parking assistance  
system may produce incorrect warning sig-  
nals that are caused by external audio  
sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-  
quencies that the system works with. Ex-  
amples of such sources include horns, wet  
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and  
motorcycle exhaust pipes.  
04  
Parking assistance can be deactivated with  
the button in the switch panel, the lamp in the  
switch goes out. Parking assistance is reacti-  
vated when the switch is switched on and the  
lamp illuminates.  
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to en-  
sure that they work properly. Clean them with  
water and car shampoo.  
Ice and snow covering the sensors may  
cause incorrect warning signals.  
NOTE  
Front parking assistance is disengaged au-  
tomatically when the parking brake is ap-  
plied.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*  
The system is designed to work most effec-  
tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-  
lane highways.  
General  
B
When a camera  
side the blind spot zone the indicator  
lamp illuminates with a constant glow.  
has detected a vehicle in-  
A
NOTE  
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car  
where the system has detected the vehicle.  
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the  
same time then both lamps illuminate.  
04  
"Blind spots" covered by BLIS cameras.  
A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m  
BLIS camera  
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a  
fault arises in the system. If for example the  
system’s cameras are obscured then the  
BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is  
shown in the information display. In such  
cases, check and clean the lenses. If neces-  
sary, the system can be switched off tempo-  
rarily by pressing the BLIS button, see  
page 133.  
Indicator lamp  
BLIS symbol  
Cleaning  
In order to work most effectively the BLIS  
camera lenses must be clean. The lenses can  
be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.  
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not  
scratched.  
BLIS is an information system based on dig-  
ital camera technology that under certain  
conditions can help to draw the driver’s at-  
tention to vehicles moving in the same direc-  
tion as the host vehicle in the so-called "blind  
spot".  
IMPORTANT  
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice  
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away  
from the lenses.  
WARNING  
The system is a supplement to, not a re-  
placement for, a safe driving style and use  
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace  
the driver’s attention and responsibility. The  
responsibility for changing lanes safely al-  
ways rests with the driver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
     
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*  
the vehicles. This means for example that the  
When BLIS operates  
Activating/deactivating  
system does not react to a trailer without  
headlamps which is towed behind a car or  
truck.  
The system operates when the car is driven  
at a speed above 10 km/h.  
Overtaking  
The system is designed to react if:  
WARNING  
The system does not react to bicycles or  
mopeds.  
• you overtake another vehicle at a speed of  
up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle  
The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by in-  
tensive light or when driving in the dark  
when there are no light sources (e.g. street  
lighting or other vehicles). The system may  
then interpret the lack of light as if the cam-  
eras have been blocked.  
• you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling  
up to 70 km/h faster than you are travel-  
ling.  
04  
WARNING  
Button for activating/deactivating  
In both cases a message is shown in the in-  
formation display.  
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.  
BLIS does not work when the car is revers-  
ing.  
A wide trailer coupled to the car can con-  
ceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can  
prevent the vehicle in the screened area  
from being detected by BLIS.  
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.  
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash  
three times when BLIS is activated.  
When driving in such conditions system  
performance may be temporarily deterio-  
rate and a text message is shown, see  
page 134. If the message disappears auto-  
matically then BLIS has returned to normal  
functionality.  
The system can be deactivated/activated  
when the engine is started by pressing BLIS.  
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the but-  
ton goes out and a text message is shown on  
the dashboard display.  
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar  
to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in  
heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.  
Daylight and darkness  
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of  
the surrounding vehicles. The system is de-  
signed to detect motor vehicles such as cars,  
trucks, buses and motorcycles.  
When BLIS is activated the light in the button  
illuminates, a new text message is shown on  
the display and the indicator lamps in the  
door panels flash three times. Press the  
READ button to clear the text message. For  
more information on messages, see page 97.  
In darkness the system reacts to the head-  
lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head-  
lamps of surrounding vehicles are not  
switched on then the system does not detect  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
 
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*  
BLIS system messages  
Text on the  
System status  
display  
Blind spot syst. Blind spot syst. disen-  
Service  
required  
gaged. Contact an  
authorised Volvo  
workshop.  
Blind spot syst. BLIS camera blocked.  
camera  
blocked  
Clean the lenses.  
04  
Blind spot syst. BLIS system on  
ON  
Blind spot syst. BLIS system off  
OFF  
BLIS function  
reduced  
BLIS function is reduced  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
 
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Comfort inside the passenger compartment  
Storage spaces  
1
2
3
4
04  
8
7
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
     
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Comfort inside the passenger compartment  
Storage compartment in door panel  
Tunnel console  
Glovebox  
Storage pocket on front edge of front  
seat cushions  
A
B
Ticket clip  
1
2
Glovebox  
Storage compartment, cup holder  
Jacket holder  
Cup holder in armrest, rear seat  
Storage pocket  
04  
Jacket holder  
The jacket holder is only designed for light  
clothing.  
Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs)  
and AUX input under the armrest.  
The owner’s manual and maps can be kept  
here. There are also holders for pens and fuel  
cards. The glovebox can be locked manually  
with the key blade, see page 37.  
Includes cup holder for driver and pas-  
senger, and 12 V socket and small com-  
partment. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter  
are specified then the 12 V socket is  
replaced by a cigarette lighter and the  
small compartment by a detachable ash-  
tray.)  
Floor mats*  
Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor  
mats.  
WARNING  
Cigarette lighter and ashtray*  
The ashtray in the tunnel console is emptied  
by lifting it straight up.  
The floor mat at the driver’s seat must be  
firmly fitted and secured in the attachment  
clips to prevent it from being trapped  
around and under the pedals.  
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.  
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.  
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the  
heated coils.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
     
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Comfort inside the passenger compartment  
For the socket to supply current, the ignition  
must be in at least position I, see page 59.  
Vanity mirror  
12 V socket  
WARNING  
Always leave the plug in the socket when  
the socket is not in use.  
04  
Vanity mirror with lighting.  
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.  
.
The light illuminates automatically when the  
cover is lifted.  
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.  
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V  
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers  
and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
 
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Comfort inside the passenger compartment  
Electrical socket in cargo area*  
First aid equipment*  
The equipment is located in the cargo area.  
The bag has a Velcro strap so that it can be  
attached to the cargo area wall.  
04  
Fold down the cover to access the electrical  
socket. It works irrespective of whether or  
not the ignition is switched on. Use the elec-  
trical socket with the engine running to avoid  
discharging the battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Comfort inside the passenger compartment  
Glass*  
Cargo area mat*  
Refrigerator*  
04  
There is a storage compartment for two  
glasses and a bottle opener under the cover  
in the armrest.  
The rear seat must be folded forward slightly  
in cars with refrigerator before the cargo area  
mat can be removed. Fold the backrest for-  
ward by pulling the handle, see page 159.  
The refrigerator is located behind the armrest  
in the rear seat. The refrigerator is always op-  
erational when the engine is running or in ig-  
nition position II and is switched off when the  
engine is switched off. The refrigerator has a  
capacity of 11.5 litres.  
WARNING  
The refrigerator needs a free circulation of air  
for optimum functionality. For this reason,  
leave at least 5 cm of free space at the refrig-  
erator air intake in the cargo area.  
Store glasses in the storage compartment  
or in cup holders and make sure that the  
armrest cover is closed for the journey.  
WARNING  
Store bottles well sealed in the refrigerator  
and make sure that the refrigerator door is  
closed for the journey.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
     
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Bluetooth handsfree*  
General  
Phone functions, controls overview  
NOTE  
Only a selection of mobile phones is fully  
2
compatible with the handsfree function. In-  
formation on compatible phones is availa-  
ble at Volvo dealers and at  
1
2
3
4
www.volvocars.com.  
3
1
6
5
04  
4
System overview  
Centre console control panel  
Mobile phone  
Volume. Same functionality available in  
steering wheel keypad.  
Microphone  
Number and letter buttons  
On/Off  
Steering wheel keypad  
Centre console  
Navigation button  
Bluetooth™  
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth  
can be connected wirelessly to the audio  
system. The audio system then works hands-  
free, with the option to control a range of the  
mobile phone’s functions remotely. The mo-  
bile phone can always be operated by its  
own keys irrespective of whether or not it is  
connected.  
End/refuse calls, clear entered charac-  
ters, interrupt current function. Same  
functionality available in steering wheel  
keypad.  
Accept calls. Same functionality available  
in steering wheel keypad.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
       
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Bluetooth handsfree*  
already been registered then these are also  
shown.  
To call  
Remember  
1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown  
at the top of the display and that the  
symbol is visible.  
The menus are controlled from the centre  
console and the steering wheel keypad. For  
general information on menus, see page 94.  
3. Select Add phone.  
The audio system searches for mobile  
phones in the vicinity. The search takes ap-  
proximately 30 seconds. The mobile phones  
detected are specified with their respective  
Bluetooth™ name in the display. The hands-  
free function’s Bluetooth™ name is shown in  
the mobile phone such as My Car.  
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,  
see page 143.  
Activating/deactivating  
3. Press ENTER.  
A short press on PHONE activates the  
handsfree function. The text TELEFON at the  
top of the display shows that it is in phone  
mode. The symbol  
handsfree function is active.  
The call is interrupted with EXIT.  
shows that the  
Disconnecting the mobile phone  
Automatic disconnection takes place if the  
mobile phone moves out of the audio sys-  
tem’s range. For more information on con-  
nection, see page 143.  
04  
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the  
audio system display.  
One long press on PHONE deactivates the  
handsfree function and disconnects a con-  
nected phone.  
5. Enter the number series shown in the  
audio system display via the mobile phone  
keypad.  
Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-  
vating the handsfree function with one long  
press on PHONE. The handsfree function is  
also deactivated when the engine is switched  
Connect mobile phone  
The mobile phone is registered and con-  
nected automatically to the audio system  
while the text Synchronizing is shown in the  
display. For more information on how mobile  
phones are registered, see page 143.  
A mobile phone is connected in different  
ways depending on whether or not it has  
been connected previously. To connect a  
mobile phone for the first time, follow the in-  
structions below.  
1
off or when a door is opened .  
When the mobile phone has been discon-  
nected an ongoing call can be continued with  
the mobile phone’s built-in microphone and  
speaker.  
When the connection is established the  
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible  
via Bluetooth™, see mobile phone manual  
or www.volvocars.com  
symbol  
is shown and the mobile phone  
Bluetooth™ name is shown in the display.  
Now the mobile phone can be controlled  
from the audio system.  
2. Activate the handsfree function with  
PHONE.  
NOTE  
Some mobile phones require that the  
changeover from handsfree is confirmed  
from the phone’s keypad.  
The menu option Add phone is shown in the  
display. If one or more mobile phones have  
1
Only Keyless Drive  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Bluetooth handsfree*  
Phone book – searching in the phone  
book.  
Making and receiving calls  
Audio settings  
Incoming calls  
Call volume  
NOTE  
Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the  
audio system is in CD or FM mode for exam-  
ple. Refuse or end with EXIT.  
The call volume can be regulated when the  
handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the  
steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.  
A new call cannot be started during an on-  
going call.  
Automatic answer  
Audio system volume  
The automatic answer function means that  
calls are accepted automatically. Activate/  
deactivate under Phone settings Call op-  
tions Automatic answer.  
Providing there is no ongoing call taking  
place, the audio system volume is controlled  
as usual with VOLUME. In order to control  
audio system volume during an ongoing call  
you have to switch to one of the audio sourc-  
es.  
04  
Call menu  
Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing  
call to access the following functions:  
The audio source can be automatically mut-  
ed for incoming calls under Phone settings  
Sounds and volume  
Mute radio.  
Mute – the audio system microphone is  
muted.  
Ring volume  
Go to Phone settings  
Secrecy – the call is transferred to the  
mobile phone.  
Sounds and vol-  
ume  
Ring volume and adjust with  
on the navigation button.  
/
NOTE  
With certain mobile phones the connection  
is terminated when the privacy function is  
used. This is normal.The handsfree function  
asks if you want to reconnect.  
Ring signals  
The handsfree function has integrated ring  
signals that can be selected under Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
         
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Bluetooth handsfree*  
settings  
signals  
Sounds and volume  
Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc.  
Ring  
More on registering and connecting  
Phone book  
All use of the phone book presupposes that  
the text PHONE is shown at the top of the  
display and that the  
A maximum of five mobile phones can be  
registered. Registration is performed once  
per phone. Phones can be deregistered un-  
NOTE  
symbol is visible.  
der Bluetooth  
Remove phone. After reg-  
The connected mobile phone’s ring signal is  
not deactivated when one of the handsfree  
system’s integrated signals is used.  
The audio system stores a copy of the phone  
book from each registered mobile phone.  
The phone book is copied automatically to  
the audio system during each connection.  
Deactivate the function under Phone set-  
istration the phone no longer needs to be vis-  
ible/detectable. A maximum of one mobile  
phone can be connected at a time.  
In order to select the connected phone’s ring  
1
signal , go to Phone settings  
Sounds  
Automatic connection  
tings  
Synchronize phone book. Search-  
and volume  
Ring signals  
Use mobile  
04  
When the handsfree function is active and  
the last mobile phone connected is in range it  
is connected automatically. When the audio  
system searches for the last phone connect-  
ed its name is shown in the display. To  
change over to manual connection of another  
phone, press EXIT.  
ing for contacts is only performed in the con-  
nected mobile phone’s phone book.  
phone signal.  
NOTE  
If the mobile phone does not support copy-  
ing of the phone book then List is empty is  
shown when copying is finished.  
Manual connection  
If the phone book contains a live caller’s con-  
tact information then this is shown in the dis-  
play.  
If you want to connect a mobile phone other  
than the last connected or change the con-  
nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:  
1. Set the audio system in phone mode.  
Searching for contacts  
2. Press PHONE and select one of the  
phones in the list.  
The easiest way to search in the phone book  
is with long presses on the keys 2 to 9. This  
starts a search in the phone book based on  
the key’s first letter.  
The connection can also be made via the  
menu system under Bluetooth  
Connect  
phone or Change phone.  
1
Not supported by all mobile phones.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
         
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Bluetooth handsfree*  
The phone book can also be reached  
ENTER to show the last dialled. Other call  
lists are available under Call list.  
Key  
Function  
with  
with  
/
/
on the navigation button or  
on the steering wheel keypad.  
J K L 5  
NOTE  
5
The search can also be performed from the  
phone book’s Search menu under Phone  
JKL  
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last  
dialled calls in reverse order.  
book  
Search:  
M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø  
6
MNO  
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact  
and press ENTER, or simply press  
ENTER.  
Inputting text  
P Q R S 7 ß  
T U V 8 Ü Ù  
7
Input text using the keypad in the centre con-  
sole. Press once for the key’s first character,  
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing  
for more characters, see the table below.  
PQRS  
2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to  
call.  
04  
8
TUV  
Voice recognition  
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-  
acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input  
characters.  
ton scrolls between the characters.  
The mobile phone’s voice recognition func-  
tion for dialling can be used by holding in EN-  
TER.  
W X Y Z 9  
9
WXYZ  
/
on the navigation but-  
Pressed briefly if two characters  
shall be entered after each other  
with the same key.  
AUTO  
*
Voice mail number  
Voice mail number can be changed under  
Key  
Function  
Phone settings  
Call options  
Voice  
+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %  
#
space 1-? ! , . : " ' ( )  
0
+
mail number. If there is no number stored  
then this menu can be reached with one long  
press on 1. Press 1 for a long time to use the  
stored number.  
1
A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç  
2
SCAN  
#
ABC  
Call lists  
D E F 3 È É  
G H I 4 Ì  
3
DEF  
The call lists are copied to the handsfree  
function at each new connection and are  
then updated during the connection. Press  
4
GHI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
   
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Built-in phone*  
General  
Remember  
SIM card  
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM  
card (Subscriber Identity Module). For instal-  
lation, see page 149. Emergency calls to  
emergency numbers can be made without a  
SIM card.  
Making and receiving calls  
Making calls  
1. Switch on the phone.  
2. If PHONE is not shown in the display,  
briefly press PHONE.  
2
1
3
4
3. Dial the number or use the phone book,  
see page 143.  
5
4. Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick  
up the privacy handset. Release the  
handset by pulling it down.  
Menus and controls  
The menus are navigated using the control  
04  
panel  
and the steering wheel  
keypad.  
For general information on menus, see  
page 94. For information on the phone’s con-  
trols, see page 140.  
End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up  
the privacy handset.  
System overview  
Microphone  
SIM card reader  
Keypad, see page 109.  
Control panel  
On/Off  
Incoming calls  
Switch on the phone with a short press  
on PHONE. Enter the PIN code if necessary.  
The  
switched on. When this symbol is shown  
calls can be received even if the CD menu for  
example is shown in the display. Briefly press  
PHONE to use the phone menus and dial  
out. The text PHONE shows that the phone  
menu is active.  
Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up  
the privacy handset. Release the handset by  
pressing it down. If the privacy handset is off  
the hook when the phone rings then calls  
must be received using ENTER.  
Privacy handset  
symbol shows that the phone is  
Safety  
Only entrust phone servicing to an author-  
ised Volvo workshop. The built-in phone  
must be switched off during refuelling or in  
the vicinity of blasting work. IDIS limits the  
menu system depending on the speed of the  
car, see page 147.  
End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up  
the privacy handset. Refuse calls using EXIT.  
Automatic answer  
See page 142.  
Switch off the phone with one long press on  
PHONE.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
             
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Built-in phone*  
Call waiting  
Mute mode  
During a call  
The function enables a new call to be an-  
swered during an ongoing call. The new call  
is answered as usual and the previous call is  
put on hold. Activate/deactivate under  
Mute mode involves deactivating the micro-  
phone, see page 145. Activate/deactivate the  
microphone using the Microphone On/Off  
menu option.  
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to ac-  
cess the In-call menu.  
To call  
Phone settings  
Call options Call wait-  
1. Put the call on hold under Hold.  
ing.  
2. Dial the number of the third party or use  
the Phonebook menu option.  
Automatic diversions  
Switch between calls using the Change  
menu option.  
Incoming calls can be diverted automatically  
depending on the type of call and situation.  
Activate/deactivate under Call options Di-  
versions.  
04  
Conference calls  
A conference call consists of several parties.  
It can be initiated when a call is underway  
and another is on hold. The Connect menu  
option starts the conference call.  
All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con-  
ference call is terminated.  
Switching between the privacy handset  
and handsfree  
Switch from handsfree to the privacy hand-  
set by picking up the privacy handset or se-  
lecting Handset in the menu.  
Switch from the privacy handset to hands-  
free using the Handsfree menu option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Built-in phone*  
Audio settings  
Phone book  
Other functions and settings  
Contact information can be stored on the  
SIM card or in the phone.  
Call volume  
IDIS  
The phone uses the front door speakers. Call  
volume can be controlled when the text  
PHONE is shown at the top of the display.  
Use the steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.  
IDIS (Intelligent Driver Information System)  
can in active driving situations delay or refuse  
ring signals from incoming calls. This way  
less attention is distracted from driving. IDIS  
Storing contacts in the phone book  
1. Press MENU and scroll to Phonebook  
New contact.  
is deactivated under Phone settings  
IDIS.  
2. Enter a name and press ENTER. For  
information on text input, see page 143.  
Audio system volume  
See page 147.  
Reading messages  
1. Scroll to Messages  
ENTER.  
3. Enter a number and press ENTER.  
04  
Read and press  
4. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and  
press ENTER.  
Signals and volume  
Change the ring signal under Phone settings  
2. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.  
Sounds and volume  
Ring signals.  
Searching for contacts  
See page 143.  
3. The message text is shown in the dis-  
play. Further options are obtained by  
pressing ENTER.  
Activate/deactivate the message beep under  
Phone settings  
Sounds and volume  
Erasing contacts  
Message beep.  
Writing and sending messages  
1. Scroll to Messages  
press ENTER.  
Erase a contact in the phone book by select-  
ing it and pressing ENTER. Then scroll to  
Erase and press ENTER.  
Control the ring volume under Phone set-  
Write new and  
tings  
Sounds and volume  
Ring vol-  
on the naviga-  
ume. Adjust using  
/
2. Input the text and press ENTER. For  
information on text input, see page 144.  
Erase all contacts under Phonebook  
Erase SIM or Erase phone.  
tion button.  
3. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.  
4. Enter a phone number and press  
Copying entries between the SIM card  
and the phone book  
ENTER.  
Scroll to Phonebook  
phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER.  
Copy all  
SIM to  
Message settings  
Message settings are not normally changed.  
The network provider has further information  
Voice mail number  
See page 144.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
           
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Built-in phone*  
on these settings. There are three options  
under Messages Message settings:  
the display. Write it down and keep it in a  
safe place.  
Reset to factory settings  
The phone settings are fully reset under  
Phone settings  
Reset Phone settings.  
SMSC number which specifies the mes-  
sage centre which will transfer the mes-  
sages.  
Network selection  
The network can be selected either automati-  
cally or manually under Phone settings  
Network selection.  
Validity time which specifies how long the  
message will be stored in the message  
centre.  
SIM code and security  
The PIN code can protect the SIM card from  
unauthorised use. The code can be changed  
under Phone settings  
Change the security level under Phone set-  
tings SIM security. Select maximum se-  
curity with the On option. The code will then  
need to be entered each time the phone is  
switched on. Select the next highest security  
level with the Automatic option. The phone  
then stores the code and automatically spec-  
ifies it when the phone is switched on. When  
the SIM card is used with another phone the  
code must be entered manually. Select mini-  
mum security with the Off option. The SIM  
card can then be used without the code at  
all.  
Message type.  
04  
Call lists  
Edit PIN code.  
Lists of received, dialled and missed calls are  
stored in Call list. Dialled calls are also  
shown by pressing ENTER. The phone num-  
bers in the lists can be saved in the phone  
book.  
Call duration  
Call duration is stored under Call list  
duration. Reset the values under Call list  
Call duration Reset timers.  
Call  
Show/hide number for third party  
The phone number can be temporarily hid-  
den under Call options  
Send my number.  
IMEI number  
In order to block a phone the network provid-  
er must be advised of the phone’s IMEI  
number. Dial *#06# to show the number in  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
 
04 Comfort and driving pleasure  
Built-in phone*  
Installing the SIM card  
1
04  
2
Make sure that the phone is deactivated  
and remove the SIM card holder.  
Place the SIM card with the metal sur-  
face visible  
and fit the cover on the  
. Refit the SIM card  
SIM card holder  
holder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
     
Recommendations during driving.......................................................... 152  
Refuelling ............................................................................................... 155  
Fuel......................................................................................................... 156  
Loading .................................................................................................. 158  
Driving with a trailer ............................................................................... 162  
Towing .................................................................................................... 168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
DURING YOUR JOURNEY  
05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05 During your journey  
Recommendations during driving  
General  
Driving in water  
IMPORTANT  
The car can be driven through water at a  
maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum  
speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be  
exercised when passing through flowing wa-  
ter.  
In the event of engine stop in water do not  
try restart. Tow the car from the water.  
Economical driving  
Driving economically means driving smoothly  
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driv-  
ing style and speed to the prevailing condi-  
tions.  
Engine and cooling system  
Under special conditions, for example when  
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with  
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine  
and cooling system will overheat. Proceed as  
follows to avoid overheating the engine.  
During driving in water, maintain a low speed  
and do not stop the car. When the water has  
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly  
and check that full brake function is  
achieved. Water and mud for example can  
make the brake linings wet resulting in de-  
layed brake function.  
• Get the engine warmed up as soon as  
possible.  
• Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light  
loads as soon as it is possible.  
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a  
trailer up long, steep ascents.  
• A cold engine consumes more fuel than a  
warm one.  
• Do not turn the engine off immediately you  
stop after a hard drive.  
Clean the electric contacts of the electric en-  
gine block heater and trailer coupling after  
driving in water and mud.  
• Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the  
car.  
05  
• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front  
of the grille when driving in extreme high  
temperatures.  
• Do not use winter tyres when the roads  
are dry.  
Do not let the car stand with water over the  
sills for any long period of time. This could  
cause electrical malfunctions.  
• Remove the load carrier when it is not in  
use.  
• Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm  
(3500 rpm for diesel engines) if driving with  
a trailer or caravan in hilly terrain. The oil  
temperature could become too high.  
• Avoid driving with open windows.  
NOTE  
• Use the parking heater* in cold weather so  
that the engine reaches its normal operat-  
ing temperature more quickly.  
Engine damage can occur if water enters  
the air filter.  
Open boot lid  
Avoid driving with the boot lid open. If it is  
however necessary, only drive for a short dis-  
tance. Close all windows, set the air distribu-  
tion to the windscreen and floor and run the  
fan at the highest speed.  
Slippery driving conditions  
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under  
controlled conditions to learn how the car re-  
acts.  
NOTE  
In greater depths, water can enter the trans-  
mission. This reduces the lubricating ability  
of the oils and shortens the service life of  
the systems.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
         
05 During your journey  
Recommendations during driving  
Before a long journey  
• Check that the engine is working normally  
and that fuel consumption is normal.  
Winter driving  
Check the following in particular before the  
cold season:  
WARNING  
Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic  
exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car  
through the cargo area.  
• Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil  
or other fluid).  
• The engine coolant must contain at least  
50 % glycol. This mixture protects the  
engine down to approximately –35 C. To  
achieve optimum antifreeze protection,  
different types of glycol must not be  
mixed.  
• Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.  
Do not overload the battery  
• Carrying a warning triangle is a legal re-  
quirement in certain countries.  
The electrical functions in the car load the  
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the  
ignition position II when the engine is  
switched off. Use ignition position I instead,  
as less power is consumed.  
• The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent  
condensation.  
• Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with  
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate start-  
ing in cold weather and also reduce fuel  
consumption while the engine is cold. For  
more information on suitable oils, see  
page 218.  
Also, be aware of different accessories that  
load the electrical system. Do not use func-  
tions which use a lot of power when the en-  
gine is switched off. Examples of functions  
that use a lot of power:  
05  
• ventilation fan  
IMPORTANT  
• windscreen wipers  
• audio system (high volume)  
• parking lamps  
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard  
driving or in hot weather.  
If the battery voltage is low, a message ap-  
pears on the information display. The energy-  
saving function shuts down certain functions  
or reduces certain functions such as the ven-  
tilation fan and audio system. Charge the  
battery by starting the engine.  
• The condition of the battery and charge  
level must be inspected. Cold weather  
places great demands on the battery and  
its capacity is reduced by the cold.  
• Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in  
the washer fluid reservoir.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
05 During your journey  
Recommendations during driving  
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-  
ommends using winter tyres on all four  
wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.  
NOTE  
The use of winter tyres is a legal require-  
ment in certain countries. Studded tyres are  
not permitted in certain countries.  
05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
05 During your journey  
Refuelling  
Opening/closing the fuel cap  
Opening the fuel filler flap manually  
Refuelling  
WARNING! ACHTUNG!  
AVERTISSEMENT!  
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap  
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank  
in the event of high outside temperatures.  
Open the cap slowly.  
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually  
when it cannot be opened from the passen-  
ger compartment.  
05  
The engine must be switched off before the  
fuel filler flap can be opened. Open using the  
button on the lighting panel. The fuel filler flap  
is located on the right-hand rear wing, as in-  
After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until  
one or more clicking sounds are heard.  
Remove the cover over the rear lights on  
the right-hand side of the cargo area.  
Reach in and grip the angled metal  
clamp. It is located just inside the rear  
edge of the fuel filler flap.  
dicated by the symbol’s  
arrow in the in-  
Filling up with fuel  
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump  
nozzle cuts out.  
formation display.  
Pull the clamp straight out and the fuel  
filler flap unfolds.  
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a  
click confirms that it is closed.  
NOTE  
WARNING  
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot  
weather.  
There are sharp edges behind the panel so  
move your hands slowly and carefully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
           
05 During your journey  
Fuel  
General  
Diesel  
IMPORTANT  
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204  
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to  
contaminants, such as high volumes of sul-  
phur particles for example. Only use diesel  
fuel from a well-known producers. Never use  
diesel of dubious quality.  
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommend-  
ed by Volvo must not be used as engine  
power and fuel consumption is negatively af-  
fected.  
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:  
special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel  
oil, RME (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable  
oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements  
in accordance with Volvo recommendations  
and generate increased wear and engine  
damage that is not covered by the Volvo  
warranty.  
WARNING  
At low temperatures (–40 C to –6 C), a par-  
affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,  
which can lead to ignition problems. Special  
diesel fuel designed for low temperatures  
around freezing point is available from the  
major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous  
at low temperatures and reduces the risk of  
paraffin precipitate.  
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ig-  
nited.  
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before  
starting to refuel.  
Never carry an activated mobile phone  
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause  
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,  
leading to fire and injury.  
IMPORTANT  
For model year 2006 or later the sulphur  
content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.  
05  
Empty tank  
No special procedures are required if the  
tank runs dry. The fuel system is bled auto-  
matically if the ignition switch is kept in posi-  
tion II for approx. 60 seconds before the start  
attempt.  
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is re-  
duced if the tank is kept well filled. When re-  
fuelling, check that the area around the fuel  
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the  
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-  
gent and water.  
Draining condensation from the fuel  
filter  
The fuel filter separates condensation from  
the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine  
operation.  
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals  
specified in the Service and Warranty Book-  
let or if you suspect that the car has been  
filled with contaminated fuel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
       
05 During your journey  
Fuel  
nel walls are lined with a thin layer of plati-  
num, rhodium and palladium. These metals  
act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and  
accelerate a chemical reaction without being  
used up themselves.  
Petrol  
IMPORTANT  
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most  
engines can be run with octane ratings of 95  
and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in  
exceptional cases.  
Certain special additives remove the water  
separation in the fuel filter.  
TM  
Lambda-sond oxygen sensor  
• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.  
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system  
intended to reduce emissions and improve  
fuel economy.  
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum  
performance and minimum fuel consump-  
tion.  
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen con-  
tent of the exhaust gases leaving the engine.  
This value is fed into an electronic system  
that continuously controls the injectors. The  
ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is  
continuously adjusted. These adjustments  
create optimal conditions for efficient com-  
bustion, and together with the three-way cat-  
alytic converter reduce harmful emissions  
(hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous  
oxides).  
When driving in temperatures above +38 ºC,  
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is  
recommended for optimum performance and  
fuel economy.  
05  
IMPORTANT  
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not  
to damage the catalytic converter. In order  
that Volvo’s warranty shall remain valid,  
never mix alcohol with petrol, as the fuel  
system could be damaged. Do not use ad-  
ditives not recommended by Volvo.  
Catalytic converter  
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to  
purify exhaust gases. It is located close to  
the engine so that it quickly reaches operat-  
ing temperature.  
The catalytic converter consists of a monolith  
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The chan-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
 
05 During your journey  
Loading  
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to  
avoid damaging the upholstery.  
General  
Load retaining eyelets  
The load capacity is affected by what is  
mounted on the car, such as a towbar, load  
carriers and roof box. The load capacity of  
the car is also reduced by the number of pas-  
sengers and their weight.  
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-  
lets with straps or web lashings.  
WARNING  
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a  
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry  
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.  
WARNING  
The car’s driving characteristics change de-  
pending on the weight and distribution of  
the load.  
Always secure the load.  
WARNING  
Loading the cargo area  
The protection provided by the inflatable  
curtain in the headlining may be compro-  
mised or eliminated if the load is too high.  
Never load cargo above the backrest. Dur-  
ing heavy braking the load may otherwise  
shift, causing injury to the car’s occupants.  
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to  
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the  
cargo area.  
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake  
when loading or unloading long objects. The  
gear lever/selector can be knocked out of  
position by long loads, which could set the  
car in motion.  
05  
WARNING  
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are  
loose or protrude could cause injury during  
heavy braking.  
Always secure large and heavy objects with  
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.  
The boot lid can be opened via  
a button on the lighting panel or  
the remote control key, see  
page 43.  
• Position the load firmly against the back-  
rest in front.  
• Put wide loads in the centre.  
• Heavy objects should be placed as low as  
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on a  
lowered backrest.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
           
05 During your journey  
Loading  
Bag holder*  
Lowering the rear seat backrest  
Ski hatch  
The hatch in the backrest can be opened to  
transport long narrow items.  
1
The rear seat backrests can be tipped for-  
wards together, or individually, to make it  
easier to transport long objects.  
The bag holder holds shopping bags in  
place.  
2
05  
1. Open the hatch that is part of the floor in  
the cargo area.  
1. Pull the handle(s). First raise the head  
restraints if they are lowered, see  
page 62.  
2. Secure the shopping bags.  
2. Fold the backrest forward. Adjust the  
centre seat head restraint if necessary,  
see page 62.  
WARNING  
Check that the rear seat backrests are se-  
curely locked after raising them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
     
05 During your journey  
Loading  
Hatch behind integrated booster  
cushion*  
The hatch is not fixed into the backrest with  
hinges but is detachable instead.  
Front seat  
The passenger seat backrest can also be  
folded for an extra long load, see page 60.  
3
Removing the hatch  
After the hatch has been released and the  
backrest folded backwards, open the hatch  
approx. 30 degrees and pull it straight up.  
Installing the hatch  
Fold the right-hand backrest forward.  
Refit the hatch in the grooves behind the up-  
holstery and close the hatch.  
Release the hatch in the rear seat back-  
rest by sliding the bolt up while pressing  
the hatch down/forward.  
05  
Fold back the backrest with the hatch  
open.  
NOTE  
If the car is equipped with an integrated  
booster cushion*, fold it out first.  
Use the seatbelt to prevent the load from  
moving.  
WARNING  
Stop the engine and apply the parking  
brake when loading and unloading. Other-  
wise the gear lever/selector can accidental-  
ly be knocked and moved to a driving  
position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
05 During your journey  
Loading  
The warning triangle is fitted on the inside of  
the boot lid with two clips.  
Roof load  
Warning triangle  
1
Using load carriers  
Detach the warning triangle case by pull-  
ing both of the snap latches outwards.  
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum  
possible safety while driving, the load carri-  
ers designed by Volvo are recommended.  
Take the warning triangle from the  
case, fold out and assemble the two  
loose sides.  
Carefully follow the mounting instructions  
supplied with the carriers.  
Fold out the warning triangle’s support  
legs.  
• Check periodically that the load carriers  
and load are properly secured. Lash the  
load securely with retaining straps.  
Follow the regulations for the use of a warn-  
ing triangle. Position the warning triangle in a  
suitable place with regard to traffic.  
2
3
• Distribute the load evenly over the load  
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the  
bottom.  
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are  
properly secured in the cargo area after use.  
05  
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,  
and therefore fuel consumption, increase  
with the size of the load.  
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,  
heavy braking and hard cornering.  
WARNING  
The car’s centre of gravity and driving char-  
acteristics are altered by roof loads.  
Load no more than 100 kg on the roof, in-  
cluding the load carriers and any roof box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
   
05 During your journey  
Driving with a trailer  
illuminated and the information display  
shows High engine temp Stop safely.  
Stop the car in a safe way and allow the  
engine to run at idling speed for several  
minutes and cool down.  
If High engine temp Stop engine or Cool-  
ant level low, Stop engine then the engine  
must be switched off after stopping the  
car.  
Trailer cable  
General  
An adapter is required if the car’s towing  
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer  
has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable ap-  
proved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does  
not drag on the ground.  
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo,  
then the car is delivered with the necessary  
equipment for driving with a trailer.  
• The car’s towing bracket must be of an  
approved type.  
Direction indicators on trailer  
A symbol in the combined instrument panel  
flashes when the direction indicators are  
used and the trailer is connected. If the sym-  
bol flashes more quickly then one of the  
lamps on the car or the trailer is broken, see  
page 55.  
• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your  
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped  
for driving with a trailer.  
• The automatic gearbox has a built-in pro-  
tection system that engages in the event  
of overheating. If the temperature in the  
gearbox is too high then the warning sym-  
bol illuminates and the information display  
shows Transmission hot Reduce speed  
or Transmission hot Stop safely.  
Follow the instructions and reduce speed  
or stop the car in a safe way and allow the  
engine to run at idling speed for several  
minutes to enable the gearbox to cool  
down.  
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the  
weight on the towing bracket complies  
with the specified maximum towball load.  
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-  
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre  
pressure label location, see page 207.  
05  
Automatic gearbox  
• Clean the towing bracket regularly and  
grease the towball.  
Parking on a hill  
1. Apply the parking brake (handbrake).  
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is  
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at  
least 1000 km.  
2. Move the gear selector to position P.  
In the event of overheating the car’s air  
conditioning may be temporarily switched  
off.  
Starting on a hill  
1. Move the gear selector to position D.  
2. Release the parking brake (handbrake).  
• The brakes are loaded much more than  
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.  
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your  
speed.  
• In the interests of safety, you should re-  
strict speed to 80 km/h, even if the laws of  
certain countries allow for higher speeds.  
Steep inclines  
• Select an appropriate manual gear posi-  
tion when climbing steep inclines or at low  
speeds. This prevents the gearbox from  
changing up and keeps the gearbox oil  
cooler.  
• The engine is loaded more heavily than  
usual when driving with a trailer.  
• Move the gear selector to position P when  
parking an automatic car with a hitched  
trailer. Always use the parking brake.  
Block the wheels with chocks when park-  
ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.  
• The engine can overheat if the car is  
driven with a heavy load in hot weather. If  
the temperature in the engine’s cooling  
system is too high the warning symbol is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
       
05 During your journey  
Driving with a trailer  
• Do not use a higher manual gear than the  
engine can "handle". It is not always eco-  
nomical to drive in high gears.  
Towing bracket  
If the car is equipped with a detachable tow-  
bar, the towball mounting instructions must  
be followed carefully, see page 165.  
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of  
more than 15 %.  
WARNING  
Level control*  
Be sure to attach the trailer’s safety cable to  
the correct place.  
The rear shock absorbers maintain a con-  
stant height irrespective of the car’s load (up  
to the maximum permissible weight). When  
the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers  
slightly, which is normal.  
WARNING  
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable  
towbar: Follow the assembly instructions  
for the towball section carefully. The towball  
section must be locked with the key before  
setting off. Check that the indicator window  
shows green.  
Trailer weights  
National vehicle regulations can limit trailer  
weights and speeds. Towbars can be certi-  
fied for higher towing weights than the car  
can actually tow. For Volvo’s permitted trailer  
weights, see page 215.  
05  
NOTE  
Always detach the towball section after use.  
Keep it in the cargo area.  
WARNING  
Follow the stated recommendations for  
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer  
may be difficult to control in the event of  
sudden movement and braking.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
 
05 During your journey  
Driving with a trailer  
Specifications  
Important checks  
• The towball must be cleaned and greased  
regularly.  
2
NOTE  
When a towball hitch with vibration damper  
is used, the towball need not be greased.  
1
Dimensions for mounting points  
05  
1
(mm) 1127  
855 428 112  
360  
95  
8
Side member  
Ball centre  
1
7
5
6
With Nivomat the dimension is 97 mm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
 
05 During your journey  
Driving with a trailer  
Installing the towball  
3
5
1
The indicator window must show red.  
The indicator window must show green.  
Remove the guard plug  
6
4
2
05  
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked  
position. Remove the key from the lock.  
Insert the towball section until you hear a  
click.  
Ensure that the mechanism is in the un-  
locked position by turning the key clockwise.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
 
05 During your journey  
Driving with a trailer  
7
Check that the towball section is secure  
by pulling it up, down and back. If the  
towball section is not fitted correctly then  
it must be removed and refitted in ac-  
cordance with the previous instructions.  
05  
8
The trailer’s safety cable must be se-  
cured to the attachment on the towing  
bracket.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
05 During your journey  
Driving with a trailer  
Removing the towball  
3
1
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it  
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position  
while pulling the towball rearward and  
upward.  
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the  
unlocked position.  
2
05  
4
1
Push in the locking wheel and turn it  
anticlockwise until you hear a click.  
Insert the guard plug.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
05 During your journey  
Towing  
General  
Towing eye  
WARNING  
Use the towing eye if the car needs to be  
towed on the road. The towing eye is at-  
tached in the recess on the right-hand side of  
the front or rear bumper.  
Never tow the car to bump start it. Use a do-  
nor battery if the battery is discharged and  
the engine does not start.  
The steering lock stays in the position it was  
in when the power was cut off. The steering  
lock must be unlocked before towing. The  
ignition must be in position II. Never remove  
the remote control key from the ignition  
switch while driving or when the car is being  
towed.  
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return  
it in the cargo area. Refit the cover on the  
bumper.  
IMPORTANT  
Bump starting the car can damage the cata-  
lytic converter.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Automatic gearbox  
Move the gear selector to position N.  
The brake servo and power steering do not  
work when the engine is switched off. The  
brake pedal must be pressed about five  
times harder than normal, and the steering  
will be considerably heavier than normal.  
The towing eye is only designed for towing  
on roads, not for recovering the car. Call a  
recovery service for recovery assistance.  
IMPORTANT  
05  
Find out the highest legal speed before tow-  
ing the car.  
Cars with automatic gearbox must not be  
towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further  
than 80 km. The car must always be towed  
facing forward.  
WARNING  
If only partially raised, cars with automatic  
gearbox must not be transported at speeds  
above 80 km/h or further than 80 km. The  
car must always be towed with the wheels  
rolling forward.  
Insert the remote control key in the ignition  
switch to unlock the steering lock (so that  
the car can be steered) before towing.  
Manual gearbox  
Move gear lever into neutral. The tow rope  
must always be taut in order to avoid violent  
jerks. Be prepared to depress the brake ped-  
al.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
   
05 During your journey  
Towing  
Fitting the towing eye  
1
2
05  
Take out the towing eye that is located  
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.  
Release the bottom edge of the cover on  
the bumper with a screwdriver or coin.  
Screw in the towing eye firmly, right up to  
the flange. Use the wheel wrench to  
tighten the towing eye.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
 
Engine compartment.............................................................................. 172  
Lamps .................................................................................................... 177  
Wiper blades and washer fluid............................................................... 184  
Battery.................................................................................................... 186  
Fuses...................................................................................................... 189  
Wheels and tyres.................................................................................... 194  
Car care.................................................................................................. 210  
Type designations .................................................................................. 214  
Specifications......................................................................................... 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Engine compartment  
General  
Opening and closing the bonnet  
WARNING  
1
Volvo service programme  
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start  
automatically some time after the engine  
has been switched off.  
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-  
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is  
hot.  
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-  
ble, follow the Volvo service programme as  
specified in the Service and Warranty Book-  
let. Have an authorised Volvo workshop carry  
out service and maintenance work. Volvo  
workshops have the personnel, special tools  
and service literature to guarantee the high-  
est quality of service.  
IMPORTANT  
2
Risk of crushing! The parking brake must be  
applied before the bonnet is opened. (This  
applies to manual parking brake.)  
IMPORTANT  
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and  
follow the instructions in the Service and  
Warranty Booklet.  
Check regularly  
Check the following oils and fluids at regular  
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:  
06  
Pull the handle by the pedals. You will  
hear when the catch releases.  
• Coolant  
Move the catch to the left and open the  
bonnet. (The catch hook is located be-  
tween the headlamp and grille to the left  
of centre.)  
• Engine oil  
• Power steering fluid  
• Washer fluid  
WARNING  
Check that the bonnet locks properly when  
closed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
         
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Engine compartment  
Checking the engine oil  
Engine compartment, overview  
WARNING  
1
6
7
8
High voltage output from the ignition sys-  
tem. The voltage in the ignition system is  
highly dangerous. The ignition must there-  
fore always be in position 0 for work in the  
engine compartment.  
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition  
coils when the ignition is in position II or  
when the engine is hot.  
2
3
4
5
9
10  
Decal for oil grade  
The appearance of the engine compartment may  
vary depending on engine variant.  
Coolant expansion tank  
Power steering fluid reservoir  
Engine oil dipstick  
Radiator  
06  
Air filter  
Filler opening for engine oil  
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-  
hand drive)  
Battery  
Relay and fuse box  
Filling washer fluid  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Engine compartment  
Volvo recommends  
If the car is driven in adverse conditions, see  
Volvo’s recommendations on page 218.  
oil products.  
Change in accordance with the intervals  
specified in the Service and Warranty Book-  
let.  
Filling and dipstick  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
In order to fulfil the requirements for the en-  
gine’s service intervals all engines are filled  
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil  
at the factory. The choice of oil has been  
made very carefully with regard to service  
life, starting characteristics, fuel consump-  
tion and environmental impact. An ap-  
proved engine oil must be used in order that  
the recommended service intervals can be  
applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil  
(see the engine compartment decal) for  
both filling and oil change, otherwise you  
will risk affecting service life, starting char-  
acteristics, fuel consumption and environ-  
mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation  
disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of  
the prescribed grade and viscosity is not  
used.  
When filling oil to top up, the oil being filled  
must be of the same grade, see page 218.  
Checking the oil level in a new car is espe-  
cially important before the first scheduled oil  
change.  
The most accurate measurements are made  
on a cold engine before starting. The meas-  
urement will be inaccurate if taken immedi-  
ately after the engine is switched off. The dip-  
stick will indicate that the level is too low be-  
cause the oil has not had time to flow down  
into the oil sump.  
Petrol engine  
06  
Volvo uses different systems for warning of  
low oil level or low oil pressure. Certain vari-  
ants have an oil pressure sensor, and then  
the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other vari-  
ants have an oil level sensor, and then the  
driver is informed via the warning symbol in  
the centre of the instrument unit as well as by  
display texts. Certain models have both vari-  
ants. Contact an authorised Volvo dealer for  
more information.  
MIN  
MAX  
Diesel engine  
The oil level must be within the area marked on  
the dipstick.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Engine compartment  
Park the car on a level surface, switch off the  
engine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the  
oil time to run back to the sump. For capaci-  
ties, see page 219.  
Check the coolant regularly  
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX  
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is  
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures  
could occur, causing a risk of damage to the  
engine.  
Coolant  
Checking and topping up the coolant  
Checking in a cold engine  
1. Wipe the dipstick clean.  
2. Check the level using the dipstick. It  
must be between the MIN and MAX  
marks.  
WARNING  
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant re-  
quires topping up when the engine is at op-  
erating temperature, unscrew the  
expansion tank cap slowly to gently release  
the overpressure.  
3. If the level is close to the MIN mark,  
start by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil.  
Top up until the level is nearer to MAX  
than MIN on the dipstick.  
IMPORTANT  
When topping up the coolant, follow the in-  
structions on the packaging. To optimise re-  
frigerant and corrosion protection ensure  
that the mixture of coolant is always 50%  
water and 50% coolant. Never top up with  
water only. The risk of freezing increases with  
both too little and too much coolant concen-  
trate. For capacities, see page 220.  
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con-  
sumption may increase if too much oil is  
poured into the engine.  
06  
WARNING  
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-  
fold due to the risk of fire.  
Checking in a warm engine  
1. Wipe the dipstick clean.  
IMPORTANT  
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion  
agent as recommended by Volvo. New cars  
are filled with coolant that can withstand  
temperatures down to approximately  
–35 C.  
2. Check the oil level using the dipstick.  
3. If the level is close to the MIN mark,  
start by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil.  
Top up until the level is nearer to MAX  
than MIN on the dipstick.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Engine compartment  
Filling  
Brake and clutch fluid  
Power steering fluid  
1
Checking the level  
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-  
voir. The level must be between the MIN and  
MAX marks that are visible inside the reser-  
voir. Check the level regularly.  
Max  
Min  
2
Change the brake fluid every other year or at  
every other regular service.  
For capacities and recommended fluid  
grade, see page 220. The fluid should be  
changed annually on cars driven in condi-  
tions requiring hard, frequent braking, such  
as driving in mountains or tropical climates  
with high humidity.  
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver’s side  
The fluid reservoir is protected under the  
cover over the cold section in the engine  
compartment. The round cover must be re-  
moved first before the reservoir cap can be  
reached.  
IMPORTANT  
Keep the area around the power steering  
fluid reservoir clean when checking.  
WARNING  
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not  
require changing. The fluid level must be be-  
tween the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-  
ties and recommended fluid grade, see  
page 220.  
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in  
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further  
before topping up the brake fluid. The rea-  
son for the loss of brake fluid must be inves-  
tigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.  
06  
Turn and open the cover located on the  
covering.  
Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the  
fluid. The level must be between the MIN  
and MAX marks.  
NOTE  
IMPORTANT  
If a fault should arise in the power steering  
system or if the engine is switched off and  
the car must be towed, it can still be  
steered.  
Remember to close the cap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
     
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Lamps  
2. Withdraw the lamp housing’s locking  
General  
Front lamp housing  
pins  
.
All bulb specifications are given on page 183.  
The following list contains bulbs and point-  
source lamps that are specialised or unsuita-  
ble for replacement except at a workshop:  
3. Pull the lamp housing straight  
forward  
.
4. Detach the lamp housing connector by  
pressing down the clip with your  
• General interior lighting in the roof  
• Reading lamps  
thumb  
and at the same time guide  
the connector with your other  
out  
hand.  
• Glovebox lighting  
• Direction indicators, door mirror  
• Approach lighting, door mirror  
• Brake lights  
IMPORTANT  
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the  
connector  
• Active Bi-Xenon, Bi-Xenon and LED bulbs  
5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on  
a soft surface to avoid scratching the  
lens.  
6. Replace the bulb in question, see  
page 183.  
WARNING  
On cars with Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenon  
headlamps, Xenon lamp replacement must  
be carried out at an authorised Volvo work-  
shop. The headlamps must be handled with  
extreme care due to the Xenon lamp’s high-  
voltage unit.  
06  
All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are re-  
placed by first removing the lamp housing  
from the engine compartment.  
Installing the headlamp  
1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound  
should be heard.  
2. Reinstall the lamp housing and locking  
pins. Check that they are correctly in-  
serted.  
WARNING  
IMPORTANT  
Always switch off the ignition and remove  
the remote control key before starting to re-  
place a bulb.  
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with  
your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin-  
gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the  
reflector and then causing damage.  
3. Check the lighting.  
The lamp housing must be plugged in and in-  
stalled before the lighting is switched on or  
the remote control key is inserted into the ig-  
nition switch.  
Removing the headlamp  
1. Switch off the ignition by pressing quickly  
on the start/stop button and removing the  
remote control key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
           
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Lamps  
Removing the cover  
Dipped beam, halogen  
Main beam, Halogen  
1. Detach the headlamp.  
2. Remove the cover.  
1. Detach the headlamp.  
2. Remove the cover.  
NOTE  
Before starting to replace a bulb, see  
page 177.  
3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder  
downwards.  
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlock-  
wise.  
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.  
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.  
1. Open the lock clamp by pressing up/out.  
06  
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap  
it in. It can only be secured in one  
position.  
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the  
socket & turn clockwise in order to  
secure it. It can only be secured in one  
position.  
2. Press down the clips on the cover and  
remove it.  
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.  
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.  
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178  
         
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Lamps  
Extra main beam Active Bi-Xenon and  
Bi-Xenon*  
Position/parking lamps  
Direction indicators/flashers  
1. Detach the headlamp.  
1. Detach the headlamp.  
1. Detach the headlamp.  
2. Remove the cover.  
2. Remove the cover, see page 178.  
2. Remove the small round cover.  
3. For better access, detach the main  
beam bulb first.  
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract  
the bulb.  
3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder  
downwards.  
4. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the  
bulb holder.  
4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new  
one. It can only be installed in one way.  
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.  
06  
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap  
it in. It can only be secured in one  
position.  
5. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new  
one. It can only be secured in one  
position.  
5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and  
press until a clicking sound is heard.  
6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and  
pressed in until a clicking sound is  
heard.  
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.  
6. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and  
press until a clicking sound is heard.  
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.  
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
         
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Lamps  
Side marker lamps  
Fog lamps  
Lamp housing, rear  
The bulbs in the rear light cluster are re-  
placed from inside the cargo area (not the  
LED lamps).  
1. Remove the cover by pressing in the clips  
and pulling straight out.  
NOTE  
Before starting to replace a bulb, see  
page 177.  
2. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and  
pull it out.  
1. Remove the covers in the left/right-hand  
panel to access the bulbs. The bulbs are  
located in separate bulb holders.  
3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove  
it.  
1. Detach the headlamp.  
06  
2. Remove the small round cover.  
2. Press the catches together and pull out  
the bulb holder.  
4. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise.  
3. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the  
bulb holder.  
5. Refit the bulb. (The profile of the bulb  
holder corresponds to the profile of the  
foot of the bulb.)  
3. Replace the bulb.  
4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new  
one. It can only be installed in one way.  
4. Plug in the connector.  
6. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on  
the bulb holder must always be upward.  
5. Press the bulb holder into place and  
refit the cover.  
5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and  
press until a clicking sound is heard.  
6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and  
pressed in until a clicking sound is  
heard.  
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
         
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Lamps  
Location of rear bulbs  
Number plate lighting  
1
6
2
4
6
2
3
5
5
4
Lamp lens, right-hand side  
Rear lamp bulb holder  
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.  
Position/parking lights (LED)  
Direction indicators  
2. Carefully detach the entire lamp housing  
and withdraw it.  
Direction indicators  
Brake lights  
3. Replace the bulb.  
Side position lights, SML (LED)  
Brake lights  
Rear fog lamp (one side)  
Reversing lamp  
4. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw  
it into place.  
06  
Rear fog lamp (one side)  
Reversing lamp  
NOTE  
If an error message remains after a faulty  
bulb has been replaced, contact an author-  
ised Volvo workshop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Lamps  
Courtesy lighting  
Cargo area lighting  
Vanity mirror lighting  
Removing the mirror glass  
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that  
the lamp housing comes loose.  
NOTE  
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower  
edge, in the centre, turn and carefully prise  
up the lug on the edge.  
Before starting to replace a bulb, see  
page 177.  
2. Replace the bulb.  
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and  
press back the lamp housing.  
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the  
edge on the left and right-hand sides (by  
the black rubber sections), and prise  
carefully so that the glass comes loose  
in the lower edge.  
1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of the  
lens closest to the tunnel console and turn  
gently so that the lens comes loose. (Ap-  
plies to both lamps).  
06  
2. Turn carefully until the lens comes  
loose.  
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire  
mirror glass and cover.  
3. Replace the bulb.  
4. Refit the lens.  
4. Replace the bulb.  
Fitting the mirror glass  
1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the  
mirror glass back into position.  
2. Then press the three lower lugs back  
into position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
           
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Lamps  
Specification, bulbs  
Output/  
Output/  
voltage  
(W/V)  
Output/  
voltage  
(W/V)  
Type/  
socket  
Type/  
socket  
Lighting  
Lighting  
Type/  
socket  
Lighting  
voltage  
(W/V)  
Direction  
indicators,  
rear (yellow)  
21/12  
21/12  
PY21W LL/  
BAU15s  
Direction  
indicators,  
door mirror  
(yellow)  
5/12  
WY5W LL/  
W2,1x9,5d  
Bi Xenon,  
35/12  
55/12  
55/12  
D1S/PK32d-  
2
Main and  
dipped beam  
Front  
direction  
indicators  
H21W LL/  
BAY9s  
Front fog  
lamps  
35/12  
5/12  
H8/PGJ19-1  
-/BA9  
Extra main  
beam, Bi-  
Xenon  
H7 LL/  
PX26d  
Rear position/  
parking and  
side marker  
lamps  
LED/-  
Glovebox  
lighting  
Dipped  
beam,  
halogen  
H7 LL/  
PX26d  
Courtesy  
lighting,  
5/12  
-/SV8.5  
Main beam,  
Halogen  
65/12  
21/12  
21/12  
H9/PGJ19-5  
cargo area  
lighting,  
06  
Brake lights  
P21W LL/  
BA15s  
number plate  
lighting  
Reversing  
lamp  
P21W LL/  
BA15s  
Vanity mirror  
1,2/12  
-/SV5.5  
Front position 5/12  
and parking  
lamps  
W5W LL/  
W2,1x9,5d  
Rear fog lamp 21/12  
P21W LL/  
BA15s  
Front side  
marker lamps  
5/12  
W5W LL/  
W2,1x9,5d  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wiper blades and washer fluid  
Turn up the wiper arm. Press the button  
located on the wiper blade mounting and  
pull straight out parallel with the wiper  
arm.  
Replacing the wiper blades  
Wiper blades  
1
Service position  
The wiper blades must be in service position  
to facilitate replacement or washing.  
Slide in the new wiper blade until a  
"click" is heard.  
1. Turn the ignition to position 0 and keep  
the remote control key in the ignition  
switch.  
Check that the blade is firmly installed.  
2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for  
about 1 second. The wipers then move  
to standing straight up.  
2
3
The wipers return to the starting position  
when the car is started.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
     
Wiper blades and washer fluid  
Cleaning  
Filling washer fluid  
The windscreen and headlamp washers  
share a common reservoir.  
NOTE  
The wiper blades are different lengths. The  
blade on the driver’s side is longer than the  
blade on the passenger side.  
IMPORTANT  
Add washer antifreeze during the winter  
so that the fluid does not freeze in the  
pump, reservoir and hoses. For capaci-  
ties, see page 220.  
06  
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap  
solution or car shampoo.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Battery  
Warning symbols on the battery  
Handling  
• Check that the battery cables are correctly  
connected and tightened.  
Use protective goggles  
• Never disconnect the battery when the  
engine is running.  
The service life and function of the battery is  
influenced by factors such as the number of  
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-  
ditions, climatic conditions etc.  
Store the battery out of the  
reach of children.  
Avoid sparks and naked  
flames.  
Never use a quick charger to charge the  
battery.  
WARNING  
Read the owner’s manual  
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas,  
which is highly explosive. One spark, which  
can be generated if you connect jump leads  
incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery  
explode. The battery contains sulphuric  
acid, which can cause serious burns. If the  
acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or  
clothing, flush with large quantities of water.  
If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical  
attention immediately.  
i
Contains corrosive acid.  
Risk of explosion  
06  
NOTE  
The life of the battery is shortened if it be-  
comes discharged repeatedly.  
NOTE  
An expended battery must be recycled in an  
environmentally responsible manner as it  
contains lead.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
       
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Battery  
Changing  
Removal  
Detach the black negative cable  
tach the red positive cable , detach  
the ventilation hose from the battery  
and loosen the screw holding the battery  
clamp  
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.  
. De-  
4
5
2
1
2
3
4
.
1
3
2
Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes.  
06  
Open the clips on the front cover and  
remove the cover.  
Release the rubber moulding so that the  
rear cover is free.  
Remove the rear cover by screwing one  
quarter turn an lifting it away.  
WARNING  
Connect and disconnect the positive and  
negative cables in the correct sequence.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Battery  
• Regularly check that the level is correct.  
Installation  
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.  
Maintenance  
A
IMPORTANT  
Never fill above the mark  
.
• Check all cells. Use a large screwdriver or  
a coin to remove the cell caps (or cover).  
• Top up to the battery’s max. level mark.  
(Each cell has its own Min. and Max.  
mark.)  
• Tighten the cell caps (or cover) firmly.  
2. Move the battery inward and to the side  
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.  
IMPORTANT  
Always use distilled or deionised water (bat-  
tery water).  
3. Screw in the battery with the screw in  
the clamp.  
4. Connect the ventilation hose.  
A
06  
5. Connect the red positive cable.  
6. Connect the black negative cable.  
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).  
8. Reinstall the cold section moulding.  
(See Removal).  
There may be two different types of battery.  
They are fully interchangeable with each other  
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it  
with the clips. (See Removal).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Fuses  
General  
Location, fuse boxes  
All of the different electrical functions and  
components are protected by means of a  
number of fuses in order to prevent damage  
to the electrical system in your car through  
short circuits or overloading. If an electrical  
component or function does not work, it may  
be because the component’s fuse was tem-  
porarily overloaded and failed. If the same  
fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in  
the circuit. In which case, contact an author-  
ised Volvo workshop to have the system  
checked.  
1
2
3
Location of fuse boxes, left-hand drive  
If the car is right-hand drive, fuse box  
changes side.  
Changing  
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the  
fuse.  
Under the glovebox  
Engine compartment  
Cargo area  
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the  
side to see whether the curved wire has  
blown.  
06  
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new  
fuse of the same colour and amperage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
       
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Fuses  
Positions  
Engine compartment  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
39 36  
40 37  
41 38  
34  
35  
32  
33  
30  
31  
Engine compartment, upper  
Engine compartment, front  
Engine compartment, lower  
42  
44  
43  
These fuses are all located in the engine  
3
1
compartment box. Fuses in  
are located  
2
under  
.
06  
20  
15  
16  
• 16–33 are 35–41 are of the "MiniFuse"  
type.  
2
27  
21  
24  
• Fuses 8–15 and 34 are of the "JCASE"  
type and must only be replaced by an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
17  
28  
25  
22  
18  
On the inside of the cover are tweezers that  
facilitate the removal and fitting of fuses.  
• Fuses 1–7 and 42–44 are of the "Midi  
Fuse" type and must only be replaced by  
an authorised Volvo workshop.  
29  
23  
26  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Fuses  
Function  
A
Function  
A
Function  
A
Heated washer nozzles  
Vacuum pump I5T  
10  
20  
5
Water pump (V8)  
10/  
Primary fuse CEM KL30A  
Primary fuse CEM KL30B  
Primary fuse RJBA KL30  
Primary fuse RJBB KL30  
Primary fuse RJBD KL30  
Reserve  
60  
60  
60  
60  
50  
Crankcase ventilation heater (5- 20/  
cyl petrol)  
20  
Diesel filter heater, crankcase  
ventilation heater (5-cyl diesel)  
Lighting panel  
Headlamp washers  
12 V socket, front and rear seat  
Sunroof*, Roof console/ECC*  
Relay, engine compartment box  
Auxiliary lamps*  
15  
15  
10  
5
Leakage diagnosis*  
Glow plugs diesel  
Cooling fan  
5
70  
50  
60  
Cooling fan  
PTC Air preheater*  
Reserve  
100  
20  
15  
10  
15  
Horn  
Windscreen wipers  
Parking heater*  
Ventilation fan  
30  
25  
40  
Engine Control Module (ECM)  
Control module, automatic  
gearbox*  
Compressor A/C  
15  
5
Reserve  
Relay coils  
06  
ABS pump  
30  
20  
Starter motor relay  
30  
ABS valves  
Ignition coils/Glow system diesel 20/10  
Reserve  
Engine Control Module (ECM)  
petrol/diesel  
Injection system  
10/15  
Headlamp levelling* (Active Bi-  
Xenon, Bi-Xenon)  
Primary fuse CEM  
10  
15  
20  
5
Engine valves  
10  
Radar. ACC control module*  
Speed related power steering  
EVAP, Lambda-sond, Injection  
(petrol/diesel)  
15/10  
5
Engine Control Module (ECM),  
transm. SRS  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Fuses  
Positions  
Under the glovebox  
Function  
A
Sunroof*  
20  
7. 5  
1
Reversing lamps.  
Reserve  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14  
Front fog lamp*  
Windscreen washers  
Adaptive cruise control ACC*  
Reserve  
15  
15  
10  
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23  
25  
24  
26 28  
27  
Roof lighting. Control panel driver’s 7. 5  
door/  
Power passenger seat*  
2
Information display  
5
Power driver’s seat*  
5
Function  
Rain sensor  
SRS system  
A
5
Retractable head restraint, rear*  
15  
5
Remote control key receiver. Alarm  
sensors  
Fuel pump  
06  
10  
5
20  
20  
15  
10  
5
ABS brakes. Electric parking brake  
Fold aside the interior trim covering the fuse  
box.  
Electric steering lock  
Reserve  
Accelerator pedal*, air heater (PTC) 7. 5  
Heated seats*  
Reserve  
Press the cover’s lock and fold it up.  
The fuses are accessible.  
Lock, tank/boot lid  
Alarm siren. ECC  
Start/stop button  
Brake light switch  
ICM display. CD & Radio, RSE  
system*  
Steering wheel module  
15  
7. 5  
5
Reserve  
5
Main beam  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Fuses  
Positions  
Module A (black). Function  
Cargo area  
Module B (white). Function  
Reserve  
A
A
Control panel driver’s door  
Control panel passenger door  
Control panel, rear door, left  
Control panel, rear door, right  
Reserve  
25  
25  
25  
25  
Power seat passenger side  
Keyless drive*  
25  
20  
30  
30  
D
A
B
Electric parking brake* left  
Electric parking brake* right  
12 V socket cargo, refrigerator*  
Rear window defroster  
Reserve  
15  
30  
Module D (blue). Function  
Display RTI*, parking camera*  
Reserve  
A
10  
Trailer socket 2*  
15  
25  
40  
Reserve  
Power seat driver’s side  
Trailer socket 1*  
Reserve  
Audio amplifier  
Audio system  
25  
15  
5
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
Reserve  
06  
Phone. Bluetooth  
Module B (white). Function  
Parking assistance*  
A
Reserve  
-
5
5
9
Control module Four C*  
15  
15  
Seat heating, driver’s side front*  
12  
11  
Seat heating, passenger side front* 15  
10  
Seat heating right rear*  
AWD control module  
Seat heating left rear*  
15  
10  
15  
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on  
the left-hand side.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
General  
Changing wheels  
Removing  
Tyres greatly affect the car’s driving charac-  
teristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre  
pressure and speed rating are important for  
how the car performs.  
NOTE  
Ensure that tyres of the same type and di-  
mensions, and also the same make, are fit-  
ted to all four wheels.  
Direction of rotation  
Follow the recommended tyre pressures  
specified on the tyre pressure label, see  
page 208.  
Mounting points  
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be  
replaced at a busy location. The car and jack  
must be on a firm horizontal surface.  
06  
The arrow shows the tyre’s direction of rotation  
1. Apply the parking brake and engage first  
gear, or position P if the car has an  
automatic gearbox.  
Tyres with a tread pattern which are de-  
signed to only turn in one direction have the  
direction of rotation marked with an arrow.  
The tyre must always rotate in the same di-  
rection throughout its lifespan. Tyres should  
only be switched between front and rear po-  
sitions, never between left and right-hand  
sides, or vice versa. If the tyre is mounted in-  
correctly, the car’s braking characteristics  
and capacity to force rain and slush out of  
the way are adversely affected.  
2. Take out the spare wheel, jack and  
wheel wrench that are located under the  
carpet in the cargo area.  
NOTE  
Use the jack belonging to the car.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
         
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the  
wheels which will remain on the ground.  
Use heavy wooden blocks or large  
stones.  
Installation  
1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel  
and hub.  
WARNING  
Never crawl under the car when it is raised  
on the jack.  
Passengers must leave the car when it is  
raised on the jack.  
Park the car so that passengers have the  
car - or preferably a crash barrier - between  
them and the road.  
2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel  
bolts.  
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot  
rotate.  
4. (For cars with steel rims.) Prise off the  
wheel cover with the end of the wheel  
wrench, or pull it off by hand.  
06  
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is  
important that the wheel bolts are tight-  
ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm.  
5. Loosen the wheel nuts ½–1 turn anti-  
clockwise with the wheel wrench.  
6. There are two jacking points on each  
side of the car. Crank the foot of the  
jack down so it is pressed squarely on  
the ground. Check that the jack sits in  
the anchorage as illustrated and that the  
foot is positioned vertically under the  
anchorage.  
Check the torque with a torque wrench.  
5. Fit on the wheel cover (for cars with  
steel rims).  
NOTE  
The hubcap outlet for the valve must be lo-  
cated over the valve on the rim when fitted.  
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.  
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the  
wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
This is especially important with regard to  
Tyre care  
WARNING  
winter tyres.ä The week and year of manu-  
facture, the tyre’s DOT marking (Department  
of Transportation), are stated with four digits,  
for example 1502. The tyre in the illustration  
was manufactured in week 15 of 2002.  
A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control  
of the car.  
Tyre age  
All tyres older than six years should be  
checked by an expert even if they seem un-  
damaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if  
they are hardly ever or never used. The func-  
tion can therefore be affected. This also ap-  
plies to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres  
saved for future use. Examples of external  
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuita-  
ble for use are cracks or discoloration.  
Tyres with tread wear indicators  
Summer and winter tyres  
When summer and winter wheels are  
changed they should be marked with which  
side of the car they were mounted on, for ex-  
ample L for left and R for right.  
New tyres  
Wear and maintenance  
The correct tyre pressure results in more  
even wear, see page 208. To achieve the  
best traction and more even wear on the  
tyres, the regular switching of the front and  
rear tyres with each other is recommended.  
The first change should be after 5 000 km  
and then at intervals of 10 000 km, this is to  
avoid differences in tread depth. Tyres with  
the greatest tread depth should always be fit-  
ted to the rear wheels to decrease the risk of  
skidding. Contact an authorised Volvo work-  
shop if you are uncertain about tread depth.  
1502  
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless  
bands across the width of the tread. On the  
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread  
Wear Indicator). When the tyre’s tread depth  
is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be  
level in height with the tread wear indicators.  
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.  
Remember that tyres with little tread depth  
provide very poor grip in rain and snow.  
06  
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they  
begin to harden at the same time as the fric-  
tion capacity/characteristics gradually deteri-  
orate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh  
tyres as possible when you replace them.  
Wheels should be stored lying down or hang-  
ing up, and not standing up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
Rims and wheel bolts  
IMPORTANT  
Winter tyres  
Using snow chains  
Snow chains may only be used on the front  
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).  
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu-  
lar dimensions. These are stated on the tyre  
pressure label, see page 207. The tyre di-  
mensions are dependent on the engine vari-  
ant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct  
tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.  
The wheel bolts must be tightened to  
140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the  
nuts and the bolts.  
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow  
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this  
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.  
Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space  
between the brake disks and the wheels is  
too small.  
Only use rims that are tested and approved  
by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces-  
sories. Check the torque with a torque  
wrench.  
NOTE  
Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types  
are most suitable.  
IMPORTANT  
Locking wheel bolts  
Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu-  
minium and steel rims.  
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-  
lent chains designed for the car model, and  
tyre and rim dimensions. Consult an author-  
ised Volvo workshop  
Studded tyres  
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently  
for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly  
into the tyre. This gives the tyre, and espe-  
cially the studs, a longer service life.  
06  
NOTE  
The legal provisions for the use of studded  
tyres vary from country to country.  
Tread depth  
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-  
peratures place considerably higher de-  
mands on tyres than summer conditions.  
Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on  
winter tyres that have a tread depth of less  
than 4 millimetres.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
     
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
2. Undo the retaining screw.  
Tools  
Spare wheel*  
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.  
4. Lift out the spare wheel.  
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only in-  
tended for temporary use. Replace the spare  
wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possi-  
ble. The car’s handling may be altered by the  
use of the spare wheel. The correct tyre pres-  
sure for the spare wheel is stated on the tyre  
pressure table, see page 208.  
The lower block does not need to be lifted  
out.  
After use  
The foam block and spare wheel must be re-  
placed in the reverse order to being taken  
out.  
IMPORTANT  
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare  
wheel on the car.  
IMPORTANT  
The car must never be driven fitted with  
more than one temporary spare wheel.  
A foam block, located in the spare wheel rim,  
contains all tools. The tools consist of a tow-  
ing eye, jack and wheel wrench. The foam  
block is screwed into a bracket in the bottom  
of the spare wheel well.  
06  
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel  
well with the rim side down. Three foam  
blocks, two under the spare wheel and one  
over/inside affix the spare wheel in position.  
The upper one contains all tools.  
Jack  
The original jack should only be used for  
changing wheels. The jack’s thread must al-  
ways be well greased.  
The same bolt runs through to secure the  
spare wheel and the foam blocks.  
Crank the jack together  
Taking out the spare wheel  
1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat for-  
ward.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
emergency puncture repair kit if they have  
larger slits, cracks or similar damage.  
Emergency puncture repair  
NOTE  
Puncture repair types  
12 V sockets for the compressor are located  
by the centre console in the front, by the rear  
seat and in the cargo area. Choose the elec-  
trical socket that is nearest the punctured  
tyre.  
The car can be supplied with two different  
types of emergency puncture repair kit.  
They are each described individually and  
are named variant 1 and variant 2  
Taking out the emergency puncture  
repair kit  
Set up the warning triangle adjacent to a traf-  
ficked location. The emergency puncture re-  
pair kit is located under the floor in the cargo  
area.  
General  
The emergency puncture repair kit is used to  
seal the puncture and to check and adjust  
the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor  
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works  
as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle  
must be replaced before its expiration date  
and after use. For information on replace-  
ment, see page 202 for type 1 or page 206  
for type 2.  
Emergency puncture repair kit, type 1 see  
page 200.  
1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat for-  
ward.  
2. Unscrew the retaining screw.  
3. Lift away the foam block holding the  
jack and wheel wrench.  
06  
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-  
tured in the tread.  
4. Lift up the emergency puncture repair  
kit.  
NOTE  
Replace the parts after use.  
The emergency puncture repair kit is only  
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in  
the tread.  
WARNING  
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h  
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been  
used. The temporarily sealed tyre must be  
changed as soon as possible (maximum  
driving distance: 200 km).  
The emergency puncture repair kit has limit-  
ed capacity to seal tyres which have punc-  
tures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the  
Emergency puncture repair kit, type 2 see  
page 204.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
2. Unscrew the wheel’s dust cap and  
Sealing punctured tyres  
Variant 1  
screw in the air hose valve connection  
to the bottom of the thread on the tyre’s  
air valve.  
Inflating tyres  
3. Connect the lead  
12 V sockets.  
4. Start the engine.The car must be in a  
well-ventilated place.  
to one of the car’s  
3
2
3
2
WARNING  
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in  
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-  
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suffi-  
cient ventilation.  
5. Start the compressor by flicking the  
switch  
to position I.  
6. Pump up the tyre to the pressure speci-  
fied on the tyre pressure label.  
06  
7. Switch off the compressor, the  
switch  
should be in position 0. De-  
5
tach the air hose and unplug the lead.  
Refit the dust cap.  
1
6
8. Put the lead  
and air hose  
into the  
side compartment  
.
4
8
9. Put the puncture repair kit back under  
the floor in the cargo area.  
1. Remove the decal  
regarding the high-  
est permitted speed from the emergency  
puncture repair kit and stick it on the  
steering wheel where it can be clearly  
seen by the driver.  
The compressor must not run for more than  
10 minutes. Let it cool afterwards as there is  
a risk of overheating.  
1. Ensure that the orange switch  
position 0 and take out the lead  
is in  
and air  
hose  
from the side compartment  
.
2. Ensure that the orange switch  
is in  
and  
Objects with a volume up to 50 litres can be  
inflated with the compressor.  
position 0 and take out the lead  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
air hose  
from the side  
8. Pump the tyre to a pressure of between  
Final check  
WARNING  
compartment  
.
1.8 bar and 3.5 bar. If the pressure does  
not reach 1.8 bar after 10 minutes of  
pumping, the compressor must be  
turned off so it does not overheat.  
3. Screw the air hose’s valve connection to  
the bottom of the thread on the tyre’s air  
valve.  
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h  
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been  
used. The temporarily sealed tyre must be  
changed as soon as possible (maximum  
driving distance: 200 km).  
4. Connect the lead  
socket.  
to the car’s 12 V  
WARNING  
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-  
pressor is running. Be particularly observ-  
ant of the tyre walls. If cracks, irregularities  
or other damage appears, turn off the com-  
pressor immediately. Under these circum-  
stances your journey should not continue.  
Contact an authorised tyre centre.  
5. Release the safety catch  
orange-coloured part  
position, until a click is heard.  
and turn the  
to the vertical  
NOTE  
6. Start the engine.The car must be in a  
well-ventilated place.  
Do not raise the orange-coloured part (7)  
when the compressor is only to be used for  
inflation.  
9. Undo the air hose  
valve and refit the dust cap. Unplug the  
lead from the 12 V electrical socket.  
Fold the orange-coloured part back  
into its original position and secure the  
from the tyre’s air  
1. Unscrew the dust cap and connect the air  
hose  
to the tyre’s air valve. Connect  
to the 12 V socket. Read the  
7
the lead  
pressure on the compressor. If the tyre  
pressure is below 1.3 bar, the tyre has not  
been sufficiently well sealed. Under these  
circumstances your journey should not be  
continued. Contact a tyre centre.  
catch  
. Keep the emergency repair kit  
5
06  
in a safe place in the car.  
10.Immediately drive about 3 km, at a  
maximum speed of 80 km/h, to allow  
the sealing fluid to seal the tyre well.  
2. If the tyre pressure is higher than  
1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the  
pressure stated on the tyre pressure  
label. Relieve pressure with the reduc-  
4
8
7. Start the compressor by flicking the  
switch to position I. There will be a  
tion valve  
if the tyre pressure is too  
temporary pressure increase of max.  
4 bar while the sealing fluid is pumped  
in. After approx. 1 minute, the pressure  
will drop and the gauge will indicate the  
correct tyre pressure.  
high, see page 208.  
3. Switch off the compressor, the  
switch  
should be in position 0. De-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
tach the air hose and unplug the lead.  
Refit the dust cap.  
Replacing the sealing fluid canister  
1
4. Put the lead  
and air hose  
into the  
side compartment  
.
2
6
8
5. Put the puncture repair kit back under  
the floor in the cargo area.  
The compressor must not run for more than  
10 minutes. Let it cool afterwards as there is  
a risk of overheating.  
3
4
5
NOTE  
9
The canister with sealant and hose should  
be replaced after use.  
The sealing fluid canister should be replaced  
before its expiration date, see the date  
label  
the canister  
hose should be replaced.  
, or after puncture repair. After use,  
with holder and air  
10  
This replacement can be carried out by an  
authorised Volvo workshop or by following  
the instructions.  
06  
IMPORTANT  
Read the safety instructions on the bottom  
of the canister.  
WARNING  
Ensure the compressor is not connected to  
the 12 V socket when the canister is re-  
placed, there is a risk of residual air pres-  
sure in the canister.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
3. Unscrew and remove the canister  
4. Check that the seal on the new  
canister is not damaged. Screw in the  
canister.  
.
3. Push down the button  
while turning  
Replacing the canister before the expi-  
ration date has been reached  
the canister  
and the holder clock-  
wise. Remove them.  
1
4. Pull out the air hose  
, see page 202.  
5. Refit the case  
correctly fitted. Screw it on with the  
screws  
. Check that the case is  
5. Wipe off remaining sealing fluid with a  
rag or scrape it away if it has already  
dried.  
2
.
6. Affix the speed label  
and new date  
6. Fit a new air hose  
fitted correctly.  
and check that it is  
label to the tyre repair kit.  
Treat the removed canister as hazardous  
waste.  
7. Check that the seal  
on the new  
3
4
5
canister is not damaged. Screw the  
holder  
it anticlockwise until a click is heard.  
8. Refit the case . Check that the case is  
correctly fitted. Screw it on with the  
screws  
9. Affix the speed label  
label to the tyre repair kit.  
onto the canister  
and turn  
Replacing the canister and hose  
6
.
7
6
8
and new date  
10  
The empty canister and air hose can be treat-  
ed as normal waste.  
06  
9
1. Undo the two screws  
coloured case  
2. Remove the speed label  
label , and open the safety catch  
Loosen the case and take it off.  
on the orange-  
1. Undo the two screws  
coloured case  
2. Remove the speed label  
label  
Loosen the case  
on the orange-  
.
.
and date  
and date  
.
, and open the safety catch  
.
and take it off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
Air hose  
Variant 2  
Overview  
IMPORTANT  
Sealing fluid bottle  
Pressure gauge  
Gloves  
Risk of overheating. The compressor must  
not run for more than 10 minutes.  
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the  
air hose and cable.  
Inflating the tyres  
The car’s original tyres can be inflated by the  
compressor.  
7. Refit the dust cap.  
1. The compressor must be switched off.  
Make sure that the switch is in position 0  
and locate the cable and air hose.  
2. Unscrew the wheel’s dust cap and  
screw in the air hose valve connection  
to the bottom of the thread on the tyre’s  
air valve.  
3. Connect the cable to one of the car’s  
12 V sockets and start the car.  
06  
WARNING  
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in  
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-  
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suffi-  
cient ventilation.  
10  
Decal, maximum permitted speed  
Switch  
4. Start the compressor by flicking the  
switch to position I.  
Cable  
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified  
on the tyre pressure decal. (Release air  
using the pressure reducing valve if the  
tyre pressure is too high.)  
Bottle holder (orange cap)  
Protective cap  
Pressure reducing valve  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
4. Put on the gloves.  
9. Flick the switch to position I.  
Sealing punctured tyres  
WARNING  
WARNING  
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the  
case of contact with skin, wash away the  
fluid with soap and water.  
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-  
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness  
arise then the compressor must be  
switched off immediately. The journey  
should not be continued. Contact an au-  
thorised tyre centre.  
5. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew  
the bottle’s stopper.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro-  
ken when the bottle is screwed in.  
When the compressor starts the pressure  
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure  
drops after approximately 30 seconds.  
6. Screw the bottle into its holder.  
10.Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
Do not unscrew the bottle from its holder af-  
ter use as surplus fluid could run out.  
06  
Risk of overheating. The compressor must  
not run for more than 10 minutes.  
For information on the function of the parts,  
please refer to the illustration on page 204.  
7. Unscrew the wheel’s dust cap and  
screw in the air hose valve connection  
to the bottom of the thread on the tyre’s  
air valve.  
11.Switch off the compressor to check the  
pressure on the pressure gauge. Mini-  
mum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum  
is 3.5 bar.  
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture  
repair kit.  
8. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and  
start the car.  
2. Detach the decal for maximum permit-  
ted speed and affix it to the steering  
wheel.  
3. Check that the switch is in position 0  
and locate the cable and the air hose.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
Replacing the sealing fluid canister  
NOTE  
WARNING  
5. Replace the bottle when the expiration  
date has passed. Treat the old bottle as  
environmentally hazardous waste.  
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the  
hole in the tyre is too big. The journey  
should not be continued. Contact an au-  
thorised tyre centre.  
To avoid splashes, leave the bottle in its  
holder.  
4. Return the emergency puncture repair  
kit to the cargo area.  
IMPORTANT  
12.Switch off the compressor and unplug  
the cable from the 12 V socket.  
Read the safety instructions on the bottom  
of the bottle.  
NOTE  
13.Detach the hose from the tyre valve and  
fit the valve cap.  
The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be  
replaced after use. Replacement must be  
performed by an authorised Volvo work-  
shop.  
14.As soon as possible drive  
approximately 3 km at a maximum  
speed of 80 km/h so that the sealing  
fluid can seal the tyre.  
WARNING  
Rechecking the repair and pressure  
1. Reconnect the equipment.  
Check the tyre pressure regularly.  
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure  
gauge.  
Drive to the nearest authorised Volvo work-  
shop to replace the damaged tyre. Advise  
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing  
fluid.  
06  
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is  
insufficiently sealed. The journey should  
not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.  
• If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,  
the tyre must be inflated to the pressure  
specified on the tyre pressure decal. Re-  
lease air using the pressure reducing valve  
if the tyre pressure is too high.  
WARNING  
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h  
after the emergency puncture repair kit has  
been used. The temporarily sealed tyre  
must be changed as soon as possible (max-  
imum driving distance: 200 km).  
3. Switch off the compressor. Detach the  
air hose and cable.Refit the dust cap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be  
driven at a maximum of 160 km/h).  
Tyre pressure  
Specifications  
Designation of dimensions  
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.  
Example of designation:  
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car  
can be driven, not the speed rating of the  
tyres.  
225/50R17 94 W.  
Q
160 km/h (used only on  
winter tyres)  
225  
50  
Section width (mm)  
T
190 km/h  
210 km/h  
240 km/h  
270 km/h  
300 km/h  
Ratio between section  
height and width (%)  
H
V
R
Radial ply  
• Tyre pressure for the car’s recommended  
wheel dimension  
17  
94  
W
Rim diameter in inches (")  
Tyre load index  
W
Y
• ECO pressure  
• Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare)  
Speed rating (in this case  
270 km/h).  
NOTE  
06  
Temperature differences change tyre pres-  
sure.  
NOTE  
Speed ratings  
The car is approved as a whole, which means  
that dimensions and speed ratings must not  
differ from those specified on the car’s regis-  
tration document.  
It is the maximum permitted speed that is  
stated in the table.  
The tyre pressure decal on the driver’s side  
door pillar (between frame and rear door)  
shows which pressures the tyres should have  
at different loads and speed conditions, this  
is also specified in the tyre pressure table,  
see page 208.  
The only exception to these conditions is  
winter tyres (both those with metal studs and  
those without). If such a tyre is chosen, the  
car must not be driven faster than the speed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
       
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
Recommended tyre pressure  
Speed  
Load, 1-3 persons  
Max. load  
Variant  
Tyre size  
(km/h)  
Front (kPa)  
Rear (kPa) Front (kPa)  
Rear (kPa)  
8-cyl  
225/50 R 17  
0 – 160  
160 +  
0 – 160  
160 +  
0 – 160  
160 +  
0 – 160  
160 +  
230  
290  
220  
280  
240  
270  
220  
270  
230  
270  
220  
210  
290  
210  
280  
220  
270  
210  
270  
210  
270  
210  
260  
300  
260  
300  
260  
290  
260  
290  
260  
290  
260  
260  
300  
260  
300  
260  
290  
260  
290  
260  
290  
260  
245/45 R 17  
245/40 R 18  
6-cyl  
225/55 R 16, 225/50 R 17,  
245/45 R 17  
245/40 R 18  
0 – 160  
160 +  
0 – 160  
5-cyl diesel 225/55 R 16,  
185 hp  
225/50 R 17,  
245/45 R 17  
160 +  
0 – 160  
160 +  
260  
230  
260  
220  
260  
210  
260  
210  
270  
260  
270  
260  
270  
260  
270  
260  
245/40 R 18  
06  
5-cyl diesel 225/55 R 16,  
163 hp 225/50 R 17,  
5-cyl petrol 245/45 R 17  
0 – 160  
160 +  
0 – 160  
160 +  
260  
230  
260  
260  
210  
260  
270  
260  
270  
270  
260  
270  
205/60 R 16, 245/40 R 18  
1
1
1
1
1
All  
0 – 160  
All  
T 125/80 R 17  
260  
260  
420  
260  
420  
260  
420  
Spare  
wheel  
max. 80  
420  
2
1
ECO pressure, economical driving  
Temporary Spare  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208  
     
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Wheels and tyres  
Fuel economy, ECO pressure  
At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre  
pressure for full load is recommended in or-  
der to obtain optimum fuel economy.  
Checking the tyre pressure  
The tyre pressures must be checked every  
month. This also applies to the car’s spare  
wheel. After several few kilometres of driving,  
the tyres warm up and the pressure increas-  
es. Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold  
tyres" means the tyres are the same temper-  
ature as the ambient temperature.  
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-  
sumption, worsen tyre lifespan and the car’s  
roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre pres-  
sure that is too low can also result in the tyres  
overheating and disintegrating. Tyre pressure  
affects travelling comfort, road noise and  
steering characteristics.  
06  
NOTE  
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a  
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also  
varies depending on ambient temperature.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Car care  
same thing after starting in very damp or cold  
weather.  
Washing the car  
NOTE  
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.  
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.  
Use car shampoo.  
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog  
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have  
condensation on the inside of the lens. This  
is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting  
is designed to withstand this. Condensation  
is normally vented out of the lamp housing  
when it has been switched on for a time.  
Exterior plastic parts  
A special cleaning agent available at Volvo  
dealers is recommended when cleaning ex-  
terior plastic parts that are not colour coordi-  
nated. Never use strong stain removers.  
• Remove bird droppings from the paint-  
work as soon as possible. Bird droppings  
contain chemicals that affect and discol-  
our paintwork very quickly. An authorised  
Volvo workshop is recommended for the  
removal of any discoloration.  
Rims  
Automatic car washes  
Only use cleaning agent recommended by  
Volvo. Strong rim cleaning agents can dam-  
age the surface and cause stains on chrome-  
plated aluminium rims.  
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick  
way of washing the car, but an automatic car  
wash cannot reach everywhere. Handwash-  
ing the car is recommended for achieving op-  
timum results.  
• Hose down the underbody. If using a  
pressure washer, keep the nozzle at least  
30 cm from the painted surfaces.  
• Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. If  
using a pressure washer: keep the nozzle  
at least 30 cm from the painted surfaces.  
Do not spray directly onto the locks.  
NOTE  
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and  
plenty of lukewarm water.  
During the first few months a new car must  
only be handwashed. This is because the  
paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.  
06  
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm  
soap solution or car shampoo.  
WARNING  
• Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty  
surfaces.  
Always test the brakes after washing, so  
that moisture and corrosion do not affect  
the brake linings and impair the brakes.  
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or  
a water scraper.  
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and  
then when driving long distances in rain or  
slush. The heat from the friction causes the  
brake linings to warm up and dry. Do the  
WARNING  
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-  
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is  
hot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
             
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Car care  
Polishing and waxing  
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull  
or to give the paintwork extra protection.  
Rustproofing – inspection and  
Cleaning the interior  
maintenance  
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-  
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regular-  
ly and follow the instructions included with  
the car care product.  
The car received a thorough and complete  
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body  
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The un-  
derbody is protected by a wear-resistant  
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating  
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the ex-  
posed members, cavities, closed sections  
and side doors.  
The car does not need to be polished until it  
is at least one year old. However, the car can  
be waxed during this time. Do not polish or  
wax the car in direct sunlight.  
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof  
upholstery  
A special fabric cleaning agent, available  
from authorised  
Volvo dealers, is recommended to avoid im-  
pairing the fire retardant qualities of the up-  
holstery.  
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you  
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt  
and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or  
white spirit. More stubborn marks can be re-  
moved using fine rubbing paste designed for  
car paintwork.  
Under normal conditions the rustproofing  
does not require treatment for approximately  
12 years. After this period, it should be treat-  
ed at three-year intervals. Please contact an  
authorised Volvo workshop if the car needs  
further treatment.  
Use water and a synthetic detergent to clean  
the seatbelts. Make sure the seatbelt is dry  
before allowing it to retract.  
Polish first with a polish and then wax with  
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on  
the packaging carefully. Many preparations  
contain both polish and wax.  
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it  
is important to keep the car clean. The car’s  
rustproofing needs to be checked regularly  
and touched-up if necessary in order for it to  
be maintained.  
IMPORTANT  
06  
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the  
fabric upholstery.  
IMPORTANT  
Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing,  
protection, lustre sealing or similar could  
damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage  
caused by such treatments is not covered  
by Volvo warranty.  
Treating stains on leather upholstery  
Volvo’s leather upholstery is equipped with  
surface protection against dirt. Cleaning re-  
protects the leather but grease and dirt dis-  
solves the surface protection. There is a  
comprehensive programme for the care and  
maintenance of leather upholstery. Volvo of-  
fers a leather product for cleaning and treat-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
         
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Car care  
ing the upholstery by which means the leath-  
er regains its protective layer.  
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and  
Touching up paintwork  
allow the leather to dry completely.  
Paint is an important part of the car’s rust-  
proofing and should therefore be checked  
regularly. To avoid the onset of rust, dam-  
aged paintwork should be rectified immedi-  
ately. The most common types of paintwork  
damage are stone chips, scratches, and  
marks on the edges of wings and doors.  
Protective treatment of leather uphol-  
stery  
1. Pour a small amount of the protective  
cream on the felted cloth and massage in  
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular  
movements on the leather.  
IMPORTANT  
Never use strong solvents. Such products  
may damage fabric, vinyl and leather uphol-  
stery.  
2. Now allow the leather to dry for  
20 minutes before use.  
Materials  
The leather has now been given improved  
protection against stains and a UV filter.  
• primer in a can  
IMPORTANT  
• paint in a can or touch-up pen  
• brush  
• masking tape  
Colour code  
Note that materials with colour that runs  
when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.)  
may discolour the upholstery material.  
Stains on interior plastic parts and  
surfaces  
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, mois-  
tened lightly with water, available from au-  
thorised Volvo dealers, is recommended for  
cleaning interior plastic parts and surfaces.  
To achieve best results Volvo recommends  
cleaning and application of the protective  
cream two to four times per year. Ask your  
Volvo dealer about Volvo’s leather care prod-  
uct  
06  
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong  
stain removers. A special cleaning agent  
available from Volvo dealers can be used for  
more difficult cleaning.  
Washing instructions for leather uphol-  
stery  
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened  
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.  
Carpets and cargo area  
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular  
movements.  
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning  
of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use  
a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.  
3. Dab the sponge accurately on the  
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the  
stain. Do not rub.  
It is important that the exact correct colour is  
used. The product decal specifies the car’s  
colour code, see page 214.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Car care  
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up  
areas. Use a soft rag and a small  
amount of lapping paste.  
Repairing stone chips  
NOTE  
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the  
bare metal and there is an undamaged col-  
our coat, you can paint straight after clean-  
ing the damaged surface.  
Before work is begun, the car must be clean  
and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.  
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the  
damaged surface. Then remove the tape  
to remove any loose paint.  
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a  
fine brush or a matchstick. Apply paint  
using a brush once the primer is dry.  
06  
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but  
mask around the damaged area to pro-  
tect the undamaged paintwork.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Type designations  
Decal location  
Knowing the car’s type designation, vehicle  
identification and engine numbers can facili-  
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo  
dealer regarding the car and when ordering  
spare parts and accessories.  
1
Type designation, vehicle identification  
number, maximum permissible weights,  
codes for colour and upholstery and type  
approval number.  
2
HFGDOIHV  
HFGJJFFOI  
BFDRYOIHV  
Gfdr_urtvb  
Seyj_tu  
Fkfu  
Seyj_tu  
Fkfu  
Ohtk_jdtr  
Mgdh_ ytegf  
Ehdfjljl_ncy  
Decal for parking heater.  
The engine oil decal specifies oil grade  
and viscosity.  
Engine type designation, component and  
serial number.  
3
Gearbox type designation and serial  
number.  
06  
Manual gearbox  
Automatic gearbox  
6
5
4
P 1208632  
3,77  
Car’s identification number. (VIN Vehicle  
Identification Number)  
A
B
T
100001  
M56L  
AISIN AW  
CO LTD  
3YYYYYYY  
MADE IN JAPAN  
TF-80SC  
SERIAL NO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214  
       
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Specifications  
Dimensions and weights  
WARNING  
Dimensions  
cm  
The car’s driving characteristics change de-  
pending on how heavily it is loaded and how  
the load is distributed.  
Length  
485  
1
2
Height  
150  
Width  
189  
Wheelbase  
Front track  
Rear track  
284  
1
2
3
4
158 – 159  
158 – 159  
Only China  
Gross vehicle weight  
Maximum trailer weight  
Weights  
Max. load: See registration document.  
Max. roof load: 100 kg.  
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank  
90 % full and all fluids. The weight of passen-  
gers and accessories, such as a towbar, load  
carriers, space box etc. and towball load  
(when a trailer is hitched, see table), influenc-  
es the payload and must not be included in  
the kerb weight. Permitted weight (in addition  
to driver) = Gross vehicle weight – Kerb  
weight.  
06  
For information on decal location, see page 214.  
Gross vehicle weight  
Max. front axle load  
Max. rear axle load  
Max. train weight (car+trailer)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
         
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Specifications  
Towing capacity and towball load  
Towball load  
(kg)  
Model  
Gearbox  
Trailer weight with brake (kg)  
All  
All  
0 – 1200  
50  
75  
75  
75  
90  
75  
75  
75  
90  
2.5T  
Manual (M66)  
max. 1800  
max. 1800  
max. 1800  
max. 2000  
max. 1600  
max. 1800  
max. 1600  
max. 2000  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
Manual (M66)  
3.2  
V8  
2.4D  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
Manual (M66)  
D5  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
06  
Trailer weight without brake (kg)  
Towball load (kg)  
max. 750  
50  
NOTE  
The use of stabilising devices is recom-  
mended with trailers heavier than 1800 kg.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Specifications  
Engine specifications  
Specification/Model  
2.5T  
3.2  
V8  
D5  
2.4D  
Engine designation  
Output (kW/rpm)  
Output (hp/rpm)  
Torque (Nm/rpm)  
No. of cylinders  
Bore (mm)  
B5254T6  
147/4500  
200/4800  
300/1500-4500  
5
B6324S  
175/6200  
238/6200  
320/3200  
6
B8444S  
232/5950  
315/5950  
440/ 3950  
8
D5244T4  
136/4000  
185/4000  
400/2000-2750  
5
D5244T5  
120/4000  
163/4000  
340/1750-2750  
5
83  
84  
94  
81  
81  
Stroke (mm)  
93.2  
96  
79.5  
93,1  
93,1  
Swept volume (litres)  
Compression ratio  
3.192  
10.8:1  
4.414  
2.400  
2.400  
2.521  
06  
9.0:1  
10.4:1  
17.0:1  
17.0:1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Specifications  
Volvo recommends  
oil products.  
Engine oil  
IMPORTANT  
Adverse driving conditions  
Adverse driving conditions can lead to ab-  
normally high oil temperature or oil con-  
sumption.  
In order to fulfil the requirements for the en-  
gine’s service intervals all engines are filled  
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil  
at the factory. The choice of oil has been  
made very carefully with regard to service  
life, starting characteristics, fuel consump-  
tion and environmental impact. An ap-  
proved engine oil must be used in order that  
the recommended service intervals can be  
applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil  
(see the engine compartment decal) for  
both filling and oil change, otherwise you  
will risk affecting service life, starting char-  
acteristics, fuel consumption and environ-  
mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation  
disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of  
the prescribed grade and viscosity is not  
used.  
Check the oil level more frequently for long  
journeys:  
• towing a caravan or trailer.  
• in mountainous regions.  
• at high speeds.  
• in temperatures colder than –30 C or  
hotter than +40 C  
Viscosity chart  
• shorter driving distances (shorter than  
10 km) at low temperatures (under 5 C)  
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for ad-  
verse driving conditions. It provides extra  
protection for the engine.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
         
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Specifications  
The following applies when the adjacent de-  
cal is fitted in the car’s engine compartment.  
For information on decal location, see  
page 214.  
ATTENTTION!  
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5  
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30  
Engine oil qualiity ACEEAA A5/B5  
Viscositty SAE 0W-30  
Volume between MIN and MAX  
(litres)  
Engine variant  
Volume (litres)  
2.5T  
3.2  
B5254T6  
B6324S  
B8444S  
D5244T4  
D5244T5  
1.3  
0.8  
1.1  
1.5  
1.5  
5.5  
7. 3  
7. 0  
6.0  
6.0  
06  
V8  
D5  
2.4D  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Specifications  
Other fluids and lubricants  
Fluid  
System  
Volume (litres) Prescribed grade  
Gearbox oil  
Manual (M66)  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
Petrol engine 3.2  
Petrol engine 2.5T  
Petrol engine V8  
Diesel engine  
-
2.0  
7. 0  
Transmission fluid MTF 97309  
Transmission fluid JWS 3309  
Coolant  
8,9  
9.0  
10.2  
12.5  
-
Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with  
water, see packaging.  
1
Oil: PAG  
Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a)  
Air conditioning  
Brake fluid  
0.6  
1.2  
DOT 4+  
Power steering  
Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or equiv-  
alent product.  
Washer fluid  
6.5  
4.5  
Use a washer antifreeze recommended by  
Volvo, mixed with water.  
2
06  
1
Weights can vary depending on the engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.  
Cars without headlamp washing  
2
NOTE  
Under normal driving conditions the gear-  
box oil does not need changing during its  
service life. However, it may be necessary  
under adverse driving conditions, see  
page 218.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220  
   
Specifications  
Consumption, emissions and volume  
Emissions of  
carbon dioxide  
Tank  
volume  
(litres)  
Consumption  
litre/100 km  
Model  
Engine  
Gearbox  
(CO ) g/km  
2
2.5T  
B5254T6  
Manual (M66)  
9.4  
10.2  
9.8  
10.7  
11.9  
6.4  
7. 3  
224  
244  
234  
255  
284  
169  
193  
167  
189  
70  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
Manual (M66)  
3.2  
AWD  
V8  
B6324S  
B8444S  
D5  
D5244T4  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
Manual (M66)  
06  
2.4D  
D5244T5  
6.3  
7. 2  
Automatic (TF–80SC)  
equipped with extra equipment that affects  
Fuel consumption and emissions of  
carbon dioxide  
Official fuel consumption figures are based  
on a standard driving cycle in accordance  
with EU Directive 80/1268 comb. Fuel con-  
sumption figures may change if the car is  
the car’s weight. The manner in which the car  
is driven, and other non-technical factors can  
also affect fuel consumption. For more infor-  
mation, see page 9.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
 
06 Maintenance and specifications  
Specifications  
Electrical system  
Type approved remote control system  
1
Delphi VDO hereby certifies that this remote  
control system conforms to the essential charac-  
teristic requirements and other relevant regula-  
tions of directive 1999/5/EU.  
Country  
General  
12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-  
nator. Single pole system in which the chas-  
sis and engine block are used as conductors.  
The negative terminal is connected to the  
chassis.  
2
Information not available at time of going to  
1
A, B, CY, CZ,  
D, DK, E, EST,  
F, FIN, GB, GR,  
H, I, IRL, L, LT,  
LV, M, NL, P,  
press.  
PL, S, SK, SLO  
Performance, battery  
IS, LI, N, CH  
HR  
Engine  
2.5T  
12  
V8  
12  
D5  
12  
Voltage (V)  
ROK  
BR  
Delphi 2003-07-15,  
Germany R-LPD1-03-0151  
Cold start  
capacity (A)  
520 –  
800  
600 –  
800  
700  
2
Reserve  
capacity  
(min)  
100 –  
150  
120 – 150 135  
06  
IMPORTANT  
RC  
CCAB06LP1940T4  
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a  
battery of the same cold start capacity and  
reserve capacity as the original (see the de-  
cal on the battery).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
   
06 Maintenance and specifications  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
   
Alphabetical index  
Airbags  
activating/deactivating, PACOS ............ 18  
Alarm .......................................................... 45  
Audio system ............................................109  
Audio volume  
A
A/C ............................................................103  
ABL – Active Bi-Xenon Lights .....................65  
ABS .............................................................87  
ACC – Adaptive cruise control ..................123  
Adapting driving characteristics ...............121  
Adaptive cruise control .............................123  
media player ........................................142  
phone ...................................................142  
phone/media player .............................147  
ring signal, phone ................................142  
AUTO  
alarm indicator ....................................... 45  
alarm signals ......................................... 46  
checking the alarm ................................ 36  
deactivating a triggered alarm ............... 46  
disarming ............................................... 46  
other functions ...................................... 46  
RDS traffic warning ............................. 116  
temporary disarming ............................. 47  
testing the alarm system ....................... 47  
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................................ 86  
climate control settings .......................103  
preset storage ......................................115  
Auto. volume control .................................112  
radar sensor .........................................124  
Additional heater .......................................108  
Automatic car washes ..............................210  
Automatic dimming .....................................78  
Automatic gearbox .....................................84  
Adjusting headlamp pattern ........................69  
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps .............69, 70  
Bi-Xenon headlamps .......................69, 70  
halogen headlamps ................................70  
Adjusting the steering wheel .......................63  
Allergy and asthma inducing substances . 100  
Anti-skid ................................................... 120  
Approach lighting ....................................... 69  
Audio  
manual gear positions (Geartronic) ........85  
Automatic locking .......................................42  
Adverse driving conditions ........................218  
AF – automatic frequency update .............117  
Air conditioning  
Automatic relocking ....................................42  
AUX ...................................................109, 112  
volume .................................................112  
audio system ....................................... 109  
headphones socket ............................. 110  
profile for seats .................................... 112  
settings ................................................ 112  
source .................................................. 112  
surround .............................................. 112  
volume ................................................. 112  
volume, auto. volume control .............. 112  
volume, external audio source ............ 112  
volume, programme types .................. 117  
Audio files ................................................. 113  
general ...................................................99  
Air conditioning, A/C .................................103  
B
Backrest  
07  
Air distribution ...................................101, 105  
Air quality system ......................................104  
Air vents ....................................................101  
Airbag ..........................................................15  
AIRBAG system ..........................................14  
front seat, lowering ................................60  
rear seat, lowering ...............................159  
Bass speaker ............................................112  
Battery ................................................83, 186  
handling ...............................................186  
maintenance ........................................186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224  
Alphabetical index  
remote control key/PCC ........................39  
replacement .........................................187  
specifications .......................................222  
warning symbols ..................................186  
Blind spot ..................................................132  
Bulbs, replacement .................................. 177  
Child  
cargo area lighting ............................... 182  
courtesy lighting .................................. 182  
dipped beam, halogen ........................ 178  
direction indicators .............................. 179  
extra main beam .................................. 179  
front fog lamps .................................... 180  
main beam, halogen ............................ 178  
rear lamps ........................................... 180  
side marker lamps ............................... 180  
vanity mirror ........................................ 182  
location in the car ............................26, 28  
Child safety .................................................25  
Child safety locks .......................................30  
Child safety products ..................................26  
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS .......132  
BLIS ..........................................................132  
Bluetooth  
child seats and airbags ..........................17  
fixture system ........................................28  
Child seats ..................................................26  
handsfree .............................................140  
secrecy .................................................142  
Boot lid  
Cigarette lighter  
rear seat ...............................................137  
Cigarette lighter socket  
locking ..............................................35, 43  
Brake and clutch fluid ...............................176  
C
front seat ..............................................136  
Clean Zone Interior ...................................100  
Brake lights .................................................66  
Brakes .........................................................87  
Call waiting ............................................... 145  
Calls  
Cleaning  
anti-lock braking system, ABS ..............87  
brake fluid, volume and grade .............221  
brake lights ............................................66  
brake system .........................................87  
electric parking brake ............................89  
emergency brake assistance .................87  
emergency brake assistance, EBA ........87  
emergency brake light, EBL ...................66  
filling brake fluid ...................................176  
parking brake general ............................89  
symbols in the combined instrument  
functions during a call ......................... 145  
making and receiving .................. 141, 145  
Car care .................................................... 210  
automatic car washes ..........................210  
car wash ..............................................210  
rims ......................................................210  
seatbelts ..............................................211  
upholstery ............................................211  
Climate control ...........................................99  
Car upholstery .......................................... 211  
Car wash .................................................. 210  
Cargo area mat ......................................... 139  
Catalytic converter ................................... 157  
CD  
07  
general ...................................................99  
sensors ..................................................99  
Climate control system, electronic ...........102  
changer ............................................... 113  
functions .............................................. 113  
Chassis settings ....................................... 121  
Clock ...........................................................58  
Collision ......................................................25  
Collision warning system ..........................127  
panel ......................................................88  
Built-in phone ............................................145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
Alphabetical index  
radar sensor .........................................124  
Collision warning system with brake  
support* ....................................................127  
Display lighting ........................................... 64  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II ............. 109, 112  
Door mirrors ............................................... 77  
Driving  
Emergency equipment  
first aid kit ............................................138  
warning triangle ...................................161  
Emissions of carbon dioxide .....................221  
Colour code, paint ....................................212  
Comfort inside the passenger  
compartment .............................................135  
Engine  
under adverse driving conditions ........ 218  
Driving in water ......................................... 152  
overheating ..........................................162  
starting ...................................................81  
Engine compartment  
Compass ...................................................119  
Driving with a trailer .................................. 162  
adjusting the zone ................................119  
calibration ............................................119  
Condensation ............................................156  
towing weight ...................................... 216  
trailer weight ........................................ 215  
DSTC, see also Stability system  
bonnet ..................................................172  
coolant .................................................175  
general .................................................172  
oil .........................................................174  
overview ...............................................173  
power steering fluid .............................176  
Engine specifications ................................217  
Condensation in headlamps .....................210  
Coolant level .............................................175  
Cruise control ............................................122  
deactivating/activating ........................ 120  
operation ............................................. 120  
E
D
Environment  
ECC – electronic climate control .............. 102  
Economical driving ................................... 152  
Electric parking brake  
Deadlocks ...................................................44  
clean air in the passenger compartment .8  
efficient emission control .........................8  
fuel consumption .....................................8  
reducing environmental impact ...............8  
textile standard ........................................8  
Volvo Cars’ environmental philosophy ....8  
Volvo workshops and the environment ...8  
EON – Enhanced Other Networks ............117  
deactivation ...........................................44  
Deep water ................................................152  
Defroster ...................................................104  
Diesel filter ................................................156  
Diesel particle filter ......................................82  
Dimensions ...............................................215  
Dipped beam ............................................178  
Direction indicators .....................................67  
Disc text ....................................................114  
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor ......86  
low battery voltage ................................ 89  
releasing automatically .......................... 89  
releasing manually ................................. 89  
Electrical socket  
07  
cargo area ........................................... 138  
front seat ............................................. 137  
rear seat .............................................. 137  
Electrical system ...................................... 222  
Equalizer ...................................................112  
External audio source  
AUX output ..........................................109  
volume .................................................112  
Electronic immobiliser ................................ 34  
Emergency calls ....................................... 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
Alphabetical index  
Extra main beam .......................................179  
Heated washer nozzles ...............................74  
Heating .....................................................103  
G
F
Gear selector inhibitor ................................ 85  
rear window ...........................................78  
seats ....................................................103  
High engine temperature ..........................162  
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical  
disengagement ........................................... 86  
Fan ............................................................102  
Fast-wind CD ............................................114  
Floor mats .................................................136  
Fluids  
Gearbox ...................................................... 84  
High-pressure headlamp washing ..............74  
Holder for glass and bottle opener ...........139  
Home safe lighting ......................................69  
Hoot ............................................................63  
Horn ............................................................63  
automatic .............................................. 84  
manual ................................................... 84  
Geartronic ................................................... 85  
capacities .............................................220  
Fog lamp  
Glass  
rear .........................................................67  
Fog lamps  
coating ................................................... 75  
laminated/reinforced ............................. 75  
surface treated ...................................... 75  
Global opening ..................................... 35, 99  
I
front ........................................................66  
Foot brake ...................................................87  
IAQS – Interior Air Quality System ............100  
Glovebox .................................................. 136  
Four-C .......................................................121  
Frequency update, automatic ...................117  
Front fog lamps ...........................................66  
Fuel ...........................................................156  
IC – Inflatable Curtain .................................20  
locking ................................................... 43  
Gross vehicle weight ................................ 215  
IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information  
System ......................................................147  
H
Ignition positions .........................................59  
Ignition switch .............................................59  
IMEI number .............................................148  
Immobiliser .................................................34  
Important information ...................................6  
Incoming calls ...................................141, 145  
Indicator lamps, PCC ..................................36  
Indicator symbols .......................................54  
Indicators ....................................................67  
Inflatable Curtain .........................................20  
Hazard warning flashers ............................. 67  
HBS – Heart Beat Sensor ........................... 37  
Head restraint, centre seat ......................... 62  
Headlamp levelling ..................................... 64  
consumption ........................................221  
fuel consumption .....................................8  
fuel economy .......................................209  
fuel filter ...............................................156  
Fuse box  
07  
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps .................. 64  
Bi-Xenon headlamps ............................. 64  
Headlamp pattern, adjusting ................ 69, 70  
Headlamps ......................................... 65, 177  
headlamp washing ................................ 74  
Headphones socket ................................. 110  
cargo area ............................................193  
engine compartment ............................190  
glovebox ..............................................192  
location ................................................189  
Fuses .........................................................189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
Alphabetical index  
Information and warning symbols ...............54  
Information button ......................................36  
Information displays ....................................54  
Instrument lighting ......................................64  
Instrument overview ....................................50  
Instruments and controls ............................50  
Integrated booster cushion .........................28  
Interior lighting ............................................68  
Interior rearview mirror ................................78  
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats ..........28  
in the passenger compartment ..............68  
instrument lighting .................................64  
main/dipped beam .................................65  
position/parking lamps ..........................66  
replacing bulbs, see also Bulbs ...........177  
Loading .....................................................158  
L
Laminated glass ......................................... 75  
Lamps  
cargo area lighting ............................... 182  
courtesy lighting .................................. 182  
dipped beam ....................................... 178  
direction indicators .............................. 179  
front fog lamps .................................... 180  
general ................................................. 177  
headlamps ........................................... 177  
main beam ........................................... 178  
number plate lighting ........................... 181  
parking lamps ...................................... 179  
position lamps ..................................... 179  
rear lamps ........................................... 180  
side marker lamps ............................... 180  
specifications ...................................... 183  
vanity mirror ........................................ 182  
Light switches ............................................ 64  
cargo area ............................................158  
load retaining eyelets ...........................158  
roof load ...............................................161  
Location of child seats ................................26  
Locks  
automatic locking ..................................42  
boot lid ...................................................42  
glovebox ................................................42  
lock button on inside .............................42  
locking ...................................................42  
unlocking ...............................................42  
Low oil level ..............................................174  
J
Jump starting ..............................................83  
K
Kerb weight ...............................................215  
Key ..............................................................34  
Lubricants .................................................220  
keyless lock and ignition system ...........40  
PCC ........................................................34  
remote control key .................................34  
Key blade ....................................................37  
M
Lighting  
Main/dipped beam ......................................65  
Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL ................. 65  
adjusting headlamp pattern .................. 70  
approach lighting .................................. 69  
automatic .............................................. 68  
control ................................................... 68  
fog lamp, rear ........................................ 67  
front fog lamps ...................................... 66  
headlamp levelling ................................. 64  
home safe lighting ................................. 69  
07  
Maintenance  
Keyless drive .........................................40, 81  
Keyless start (keyless drive) ........................81  
Keylock .......................................................85  
Keypad in the steering wheel ......................63  
right-hand side .....................................109  
rustproofing .........................................211  
Making calls ......................................141, 145  
Manual gear positions (Geartronic) .............85  
Manual gearbox ..........................................84  
Media player .............................................112  
Memory function in seats ...........................61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
Alphabetical index  
Menus and messages .................................94  
Passenger compartment filter ..................100  
PCC – Personal Car Communicator  
O
Messages in the combined  
instrument panel .........................................97  
Oil  
functions ................................................35  
range ......................................................37  
Phone ........................................................145  
adverse driving conditions .................. 218  
capacities ............................................ 219  
engine oil ............................................. 218  
filter ...................................................... 174  
gearbox oil ........................................... 220  
oil grade ............................................... 218  
power steering fluid ............................. 220  
Meters in the combined instrument panel ..54  
Mirror  
built-in, overview ..................................145  
calling from the phone book ................147  
connect ................................................143  
handsfree .............................................140  
incoming calls ......................................141  
making calls .........................................141  
phone book, shortcut ..........................143  
receiving a call .............................142, 145  
register phone ......................................141  
standby mode ......................................145  
Phonebook  
heated ....................................................78  
interior ....................................................78  
Mirrors  
door ........................................................77  
Misting  
Oil level ..................................................... 174  
Overheating .............................................. 162  
attending to the windows ......................99  
condensation in headlamps .................210  
remove with the air vents .....................105  
removing with defroster function .........104  
timer function .......................................104  
Mobile phone  
P
PACOS ....................................................... 18  
Paint  
colour code ......................................... 212  
Paintwork  
using numbers .....................................147  
PI seek ......................................................117  
connect ................................................143  
handsfree .............................................140  
register phone ......................................141  
MP3 functions ...........................................113  
damage and touch-up ......................... 212  
stone chips and scratches .................. 212  
Panel lighting .............................................. 64  
Polishing ...................................................211  
Position/parking lamps ...............................66  
Power steering fluid ..................................176  
Power sunroof ............................................79  
Power windows ..........................................75  
Pregnancy ...................................................13  
Preset storage ..........................................115  
Programme functions ...............................115  
Programme type .......................................116  
MY KEY .....................................................110  
Panic function ............................................. 36  
Parking assistance ................................... 130  
Parking brake ............................................. 89  
07  
N
NEWS ........................................................116  
electric ................................................... 89  
low battery voltage ................................ 89  
Parking heater .......................................... 106  
News broadcast ........................................116  
parking on a hill ................................... 106  
time setting .......................................... 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
Alphabetical index  
PTY – Programme type .............................116  
Putting calls on hold .................................145  
Rear bulbs  
location ................................................ 181  
Rims  
cleaning ...............................................210  
Recirculation ............................................. 104  
Recommendations during driving ............ 152  
Recovery .................................................. 169  
Refrigerant .................................................. 99  
Refrigerator ............................................... 139  
RND – Random .........................................114  
R
Rustproofing .............................................211  
Radar sensor .............................................124  
S
Radio  
Safety ..........................................................12  
Safety in the passenger compartment ........12  
Safety mode ................................................25  
SCAN  
AF .........................................................117  
EON ......................................................117  
frequency update .................................117  
preset storage ......................................115  
PTY ......................................................116  
radio text ..............................................117  
REG ......................................................117  
settings ................................................115  
stations ................................................115  
Rain sensor .................................................73  
fuel cap ................................................ 155  
fuel filler flap, electrical opening .......... 155  
fuel filler flap, manual opening ............ 155  
Refuse calls ...................................... 141, 145  
CD and audio files ...............................114  
radio stations .......................................115  
Seat  
REG – Regional radio programmes .......... 117  
Remote control key .............................. 34, 35  
power seat .............................................60  
Seatbelt reminder .......................................13  
battery ................................................... 35  
detachable key blade ............................ 34  
range ..................................................... 36  
replacing the battery ............................. 39  
Remote control system, type approved ... 222  
Random, CD and audio files .....................114  
RDS functions ...........................................115  
Seatbelt tensioner .......................................14  
Seatbelts .....................................................12  
Seats ...........................................................60  
resetting ...............................................117  
Reading the Owner’s Manual ........................6  
head restraints, rear ...............................62  
heating .................................................103  
key memory ...........................................61  
lowering the front backrest ....................60  
lowering the rear backrests .................159  
manual setting .......................................60  
memory function ....................................61  
power seats ...........................................60  
ventilated front seats ...........................102  
Service locking ...........................................38  
"Important" dialogue boxes .....................6  
"Warning" dialogue boxes .......................6  
message texts ..........................................6  
note dialogue boxes ................................6  
options .....................................................6  
point lists ..................................................6  
position lists .............................................6  
procedure lists .........................................6  
Remote control, see Remote control key ... 34  
Resetting the door mirrors ......................... 77  
Resetting the power windows .................... 76  
Retractable door mirrors ............................ 77  
Retractable power door mirrors ................. 77  
Reverse gear inhibitor ................................ 84  
07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
Alphabetical index  
Service programme ...................................172  
Side airbags ................................................18  
Signal input, external ................................109  
SIM card ....................................................149  
SIPS bags ...................................................18  
Ski hatch ...................................................159  
Soot filter full ...............................................82  
Spare wheel ..............................................198  
Specifications ............................................215  
Spin control ...............................................120  
SRS AIRBAG ...............................................15  
SRS system  
right-hand keypad ............................... 109  
steering wheel adjustment .................... 63  
Steering wheel keypad  
Towbar ......................................................163  
Towing ......................................................169  
towing eye ...........................................169  
Towing bracket .........................................163  
left-hand side ...................................... 122  
Stone chips and scratches ....................... 212  
Towing weight ...........................................216  
TP – traffic information .............................116  
Traction control .........................................120  
Traffic information .....................................116  
Trailer  
Storage spaces in the passenger  
compartment ............................................ 135  
opening and closing .............................. 79  
sunscreen .............................................. 80  
ventilation position ................................ 79  
Surround ........................................... 109, 112  
driving with a trailer .............................162  
trailer weight ........................................215  
Transmission ...............................................84  
Symbols .................................................... 120  
Trip computer ...........................................118  
Trip meter ...................................................58  
Type approved, remote control system ....222  
Type designation ......................................214  
Type designations .....................................214  
Tyres  
general ...................................................16  
Stability and traction control system ........120  
indicator symbols .................................. 54  
information symbols .............................. 54  
warning symbols ................................... 54  
Stability system .........................................120  
Stains ........................................................211  
Standby mode, phone ..............................145  
Starting the engine ......................................81  
Station search ...........................................115  
Steering force level, speed adapted .........121  
Steering lock ...............................................81  
Steering wheel  
T
Tank volume ............................................. 221  
Temperature  
direction of rotation .............................194  
maintenance ........................................196  
pressure ...............................................208  
puncture ...............................................198  
specifications .......................................207  
speed ratings .......................................207  
tread wear indicators ...........................196  
winter tyres ..........................................197  
actual temperature ................................ 99  
Temperature control ................................. 103  
07  
Testing the alarm system ........................... 47  
Timer ........................................................ 104  
Total airing function .............................. 35, 99  
Towball load ............................................. 216  
keypad .................................................145  
keypad, adaptive cruise control ...........125  
keypad, left-hand side .........................122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
Alphabetical index  
Warning sound  
Wheels and tyres ......................................194  
Whiplash injury WHIPS ...............................21  
WHIPS ........................................................21  
U
adaptive cruise control ........................ 123  
collision warning system ..................... 128  
Warning symbol, AIRBAG system .............. 14  
Unlocking  
boot lid ...................................................42  
Whiplash Protection System .................21  
Windows, rearview and door mirrors ..........75  
from inside .............................................42  
from outside ...........................................42  
keyless ...................................................42  
Warning triangle ....................................... 161  
Washer  
Windscreen washing ...................................74  
Windscreen wipers .....................................73  
Winter tyres ...............................................197  
Wiper blades  
headlamps ............................................. 74  
Washer nozzles, heated ............................. 74  
V
Vanity mirror ..............................................182  
Ventilation .................................................101  
Vibration damper .......................................164  
Volume, audio ...........................................112  
Volume, see also Audio volume ................112  
Washers  
washer fluid, filling ............................... 185  
Washing the car ........................................ 210  
cleaning .......................................184, 185  
replacement .........................................184  
service position ....................................184  
Wipers and washing ...................................73  
Water and dirt-repellent coating ................. 75  
Waxing ...................................................... 211  
Weights  
W
Warning lamp  
front axle load ...................................... 215  
gross vehicle weight ............................ 215  
kerb weight .......................................... 215  
maximum train weight ......................... 215  
rear axle load ....................................... 215  
roof load .............................................. 215  
towball load ......................................... 215  
trailer weight ........................................ 215  
Wheels  
adaptive cruise control ........................123  
collision warning system ......................128  
stability and traction control system ....120  
Warning lamps ............................................54  
Airbags SRS ...........................................56  
alternator not charging ...........................56  
fault in brake system ..............................56  
low oil pressure ......................................56  
parking brake applied ............................56  
seatbelt reminder ...................................56  
warning ..................................................56  
07  
changing .............................................. 194  
fitting ................................................... 195  
rims ...................................................... 197  
snow chains ........................................ 197  
spare wheel ......................................... 198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  

Technika MP3 Docking Station MC 109 User Manual
Teledyne Outdoor Gas Burner 7500 User Manual
Toshiba Projector TDP TW100 User Manual
Trane Water Dispenser CVHE SVU01E ENX39640712050 User Manual
Triarch Indoor Furnishings 75161 User Manual
Triax Stereo Receiver DVB C1 User Manual
Tripp Lite Network Cables S455 003 User Manual
Troy Bilt Trimmer SUPER BRONCO TB415CS User Manual
Vinotemp Refrigerator VT 34GS User Manual
Wagner SprayTech Heat Gun HT775 User Manual